JP2017018743A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine satisfactorily achieving enhancement of a degree of attention to a game through enhancement of a degree of attention to display in display means.SOLUTION: A video RAM 204 of a display control device 83 includes a unit frame area 215 in that a VDP 183 creates drawing data, and the created drawing data are transmitted to an image processing device 206 through a signal path SC1 for drawing signals and are stored in a device buffer 214. A pattern display device 29 displays a predetermined image by outputting an image to a liquid crystal display part 91 based on the stored drawing data. In this case, the drawing data are transmitted to the entire area of the device buffer 214 in both of a case where multi-view display is performed and a case where the multi-view display is not performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 28

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display surface such as a liquid crystal display device and a display control device for controlling display of the display device are known. In such a gaming machine, drawing data is created by the display control device and the created drawing data is transferred to the display device. An image processing device is provided in the display device, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display surface by performing image output corresponding to the transferred drawing data in the image processing device (for example, , See Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-7465 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  Note that the above problems are not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but also occur in other gaming machines equipped with a display device.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 includes a visual recognition area forming portion that forms a visual recognition area that is visible to a player through a window panel provided on a front portion of the gaming machine,
A display unit having a display area for performing a predetermined display, and arranged so that the display area is exposed to the window panel side through an opening formed in the visual recognition area forming unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Drive means for displacing the display means so that the display means can be arranged at each of the first position and the second position;
Space defining means for defining an accommodation space in which the display means can be accommodated behind the opening;
With
When the display means is displaced between the first position and the second position, the display means is configured to be displaced in the accommodation space.
When the display means is disposed at the second position, the distance between the display means and the peripheral edge of the opening is longer than that at the first position, and the display means and the peripheral edge of the opening. The predetermined effect using the predetermined space between the parts is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine,
When the display means is arranged at the first position, the distance between the display means and the peripheral edge of the opening is closer than that at the second position, but the opening means causes the opening to be opened by the display means. It is a configuration that can not be blocked,
This game machine
In the situation where the display means is arranged at the first position, the display means is arranged at a closed position where the space between the display means and the peripheral edge of the opening is closed so as not to be exposed to the window panel side, and the display A shutter disposed at a retracted position displaced from the closed position toward the outside of the region exposed through the opening in a situation where the means is disposed at the second position;
Production means for executing the predetermined production;
With
A light emitter is provided on the back surface of the shutter, and the shutter is formed so that light emitted from the light emitter can be transmitted toward the front of the gaming machine,
When the display means is disposed at the second position, the space defining means is visible through the space between the display means and the peripheral edge of the opening, but behind the space defining means. The side is configured to be difficult to see by the space defining means,
The effect means is displaceable between an effect position entering the predetermined space and a non-effect position retracted toward the outside of the predetermined space from the effect position, and the display means is at the first position. It is arranged at the non-production position in the situation where it is arranged, and the display means is arranged at the production position in the situation where it is arranged at the second position.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of games.

The perspective view which shows the structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a game machine main body. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. The perspective view of the game board seen from the back side. The disassembled perspective view of the symbol display unit seen from the back side. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a symbol display apparatus. The side view of the game board containing the partially broken part for demonstrating the mode in a back side base. (A) The perspective view of the movable object unit seen from the front side, (b) The perspective view of the movable object unit seen from the back side. The disassembled perspective view of the movable object unit seen from the front side. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drive area | region of a movable object unit. (A-1) Front view of the movable object unit when the shutter is disposed at the closed position, (a-2) Side view of the movable object unit when the shutter is disposed at the closed position, (b-1) 2) A front view of the movable object unit when the shutter is disposed at the retracted position, and (b-2) a side view of the movable object unit when the shutter is disposed at the retracted position. (A) Side view of game board including partially broken portion for explaining state of initial state, (b) Side view of game board including partially broken portion for describing state of multi-display state. (A) Front view of game board for explaining state of initial state, (b) Front view of game board for explaining state of multi-display state. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the image in an initial state, (b), (c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the image in a multi-display state. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a multi-view display visually recognizing from the predetermined position ahead of a pachinko machine. (A) A side view of a game board including a partially broken portion for explaining the state in the rear base, (b) an enlarged view showing the ceiling inclined portion and its periphery in an enlarged manner, (c) a bottom inclined portion, and The enlarged view which expands and shows the periphery. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electrical structure in performing jackpot determination in a main controller. The flowchart which shows the process for vibration in display CPU. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the symbol display apparatus is vibrating, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the shutter is vibrating. The flowchart which shows the process for multi-display in display CPU. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the unit frame area, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the device buffer, (c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a liquid crystal display part. The flowchart which shows the drawing process in VDP. The flowchart which shows the drawing process for normal display in VDP. The flowchart which shows the drawing process for the multi display in VDP. 6 is a flowchart showing device-side processing in an image processing device. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of creation and transfer of drawing data in an initial state, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of creation and transfer of drawing data in a multi-display state. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in an initial state, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in a multi-display state. 10 is a flowchart illustrating drawing processing for normal display according to the second embodiment. The flowchart which shows the drawing process for multi-displays. The flowchart which shows a device side process. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of creation and transfer of drawing data in an initial state, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of creation and transfer of drawing data in a multi-display state. 10 is a flowchart illustrating drawing processing according to the third embodiment. The flowchart which shows a device side process. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of creation and transfer of drawing data in an initial state, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of creation and transfer of drawing data in a multi-display state. 10 is a flowchart illustrating drawing processing according to the fourth embodiment. The flowchart which shows the process for multi-display in 5th Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the mirror unit is vibrating while the pattern is vibrating on the display surface. The flowchart which shows the heat dissipation control process in 6th Embodiment. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the symbol display apparatus in 7th Embodiment, and its periphery. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the movable object unit in 8th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”) which is a kind of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine main body 12 in the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be pivotable forward (openable and closable). . In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 can also be formed of a metal such as synthetic resin or aluminum.

  A gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported on one side of the outer frame 11. As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 13 at its rotating tip, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the locking device 13 is provided. The saddle member is received by the saddle receiving portion provided on the inner surface of the right frame portion of the outer frame 11, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 is prevented. On the other hand, when the unlocking operation is performed using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 14 that is provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, the saddle member is received at the saddle receiving portion of the outer frame 11. Is released, and the gaming machine body 12 can be released from the outer frame 11. The locking device 13 also has a function of locking an inner frame 15 and a front door frame 16 described later.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 15 as a base body, a front door frame 16 disposed in front of the inner frame 15, and a back pack unit 17 disposed behind the inner frame 15. An inner frame 15 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (openable and closable) with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 15 can be rotated forward with the left side in the front view as the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side as the rotation front end side (opening / closing front end side).

  A front door frame 16 is rotatably supported (openable and closable) on the inner frame 15, and the left side is a rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is a rotation front end side (opening / closing front end) in a front view. Side) and can be rotated forward. Further, a back pack unit 17 is supported on the inner frame 15 so as to be rotatable (openable and closable), and in the front view, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation front end side ( It can be rotated backward as the opening / closing tip side.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 15 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 22 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 23 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 in a state where the game board 23 is erected in the vertical direction, specifically, vertically or substantially vertically. The game board 23 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 23 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 15 through the window hole 22 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 23 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 23.

  The game board 23 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 24, a variable winning device 25, an upper working port (first starting ball entering portion) 26, a lower working port (second starting ball entering portion) 27, a through gate 28, a symbol display device 29, A main display unit 31, an accessory display unit 32, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 24, the variable winning device 25, the upper operating port 26, and the lower operating port 27, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 23, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

  In addition, an out port 33 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 23, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 33. The game board 23 is provided with a large number of nails 34 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 33, the game ball enters the variable winning device 25, the upper operation port 26, the lower operation port 27, or the through gate 28. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 26 and the lower operating port 27 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 23. Both the upper working port 26 and the lower working port 27 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 26 and 27 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 26 is located on the upper side. The lower working port 27 is provided with an electric accessory 27a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 27a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 27, and the electric operating member 27a is in the open state (supported state or guide state). Winning 27 is possible.

  The variable winning device 25 includes a large winning opening 25a that leads to the back side of the game board 23, and an open / close door 25b that opens and closes the large winning opening 25a. The open / close door 25b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 25, the variable winning device 25 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display unit 31 and the accessory display unit 32 are provided on the lower side of the game area. The main display unit 31 displays a variation of the picture triggered by a winning at the upper working port 26 or the lower working port 27. As a result of stopping the variation display, a winning is awarded to the upper working port 26 or the lower working port 27. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 26 and the winning to the lower working port 27 are not distinguished in the internal lottery and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 26 or the lower working port 27. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display unit 31 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 26 or the lower operating port 27 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 31. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 31 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the main display unit 31 is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 31, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 32, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning to the through gate 28 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 28 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 28 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 32 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 27a provided in the lower working port 27 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The symbol display device 29 is provided so that the display surface 29a can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through a rectangular shape, specifically, a rectangular (rectangular) opening 35 provided in the game board 23. (See FIG. 4 etc.). The game board 23 is provided with a transparent panel so as to close the opening 35 in front of the pachinko machine 10 of the symbol display device 29, but the transparent panel is omitted in FIG.

  Basically, on the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29, a plurality of variable display areas in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined order are set, and symbols are variably displayed in each variable display area. For example, a symbol sequence in which multiple types of symbols are arranged in a predetermined order is set side by side on the left, middle, and right, and the various types of symbols in each symbol sequence are scrolled up and down in a predetermined order. Is displayed. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 29 is started based on winning in the upper working port 26 or the lower working port 27. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display unit 31, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 29 accordingly. For example, the symbol display device 29 sets in advance a game number of times that shifts to an open / close execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds in which the large winning opening 25a of the variable winning device 25 is opened 15 times as the open / close execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  By the way, based on the winning at any one of the operation ports 26 and 27, the variable display is started on the main display unit 31 and the symbol display device 29, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time.

  A center frame 36 is installed on the game board 23 so as to define an opening 35 that allows the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 to be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The center frame 36 includes a roof portion 41 provided so as to define the upper edge and left and right side edges of the opening 35, and a stage portion 42 provided so as to define the lower edge of the opening 35. ing. The roof portion 41 has a ball entrance at the upper frame portion, and a pair of stage guide passages are formed for guiding the game balls that have entered the ball entrance onto the stage portion 42. When the game ball enters the ball entrance, the game ball is guided onto the stage unit 42.

  The stage part 42 has a rolling surface 43 on which the game ball can roll. The rolling surface 43 has a width of about two game balls, and has a smooth streamline shape that is symmetrical with respect to the center. Specifically, the rolling surface 43 is a peak portion whose center portion is raised upward, the left and right sides thereof are valley portions that are recessed downward, and the left and right ends are positioned above the center portion. doing. The valley portion has a shape inclined downward toward the front. The game ball that has reached the top of the valley in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the valley and is discharged from the front edge of the valley toward the lower side of the stage portion 42.

  A guide passage 44 is formed below the peak portion of the stage portion 42. An entrance to the guide passage 44 is formed at the rear portion of the peak portion, and the peak portion is inclined downward toward the entrance. . The guide passage 44 is inclined downward toward the front, and the game ball introduced into the guide passage 44 is discharged through the guide passage 44 and below the stage portion 42. The outlet of the guide passage 44 is positioned vertically above the upper working port 26 and the lower working port 27. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage 44 can easily win the upper working port 26 and the lower working port 27.

  A first holding lamp portion 45 corresponding to the main display portion 31 and the symbol display device 29 is provided at the lower left portion on the front side of the center frame 36. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operating port 26 or the lower operating port 27 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed when the first holding lamp unit 45 is turned on.

  A second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the accessory display portion 32 is provided at the lower right portion on the front side of the center frame 36. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 28 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the second holding lamp portion 46. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance lamp | ramp part 45 and 46 is fulfill | performed by the display in the one part area | region of the symbol display apparatus 29. FIG.

  An inner rail portion 47 and an outer rail portion 48 are attached to the game board 23, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 47 and the outer rail portion 48, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is attached below the window hole 22 in the resin base 21, and the game ball is operated by operating the handle device 52 provided on the front door frame 16. Is fired.

  A front door frame 16 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 15. As shown in FIG. 1 and the like, the front door frame 16 is formed with a window portion 53 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 53 has a substantially elliptical shape and is fitted with a window panel 54 having transparency. The window panel 54 is formed of a colorless and transparent glass material in the same or substantially the same plate shape, but may be formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. By providing the window panel 54, the opening of the window portion 53 is closed. Note that the window panel 54 is provided to stand in the vertical direction, specifically, the vertical direction.

  Around the window 53, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp portion 55 is provided above the window portion 53 as a part of the various lamp portions. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 55, speaker units 56 for outputting sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 53 in the front door frame 16, an upper bulging portion 57 and a lower bulging portion 58 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper plate 57a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 57, and a lower plate 58a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 58. The upper plate 57a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 51 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 58a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 57a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board 23 as seen from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a symbol display unit 61 is mounted on the back of the game board 23, and a main controller unit 62 is mounted so as to be positioned below the symbol display unit 61. A sound emission control device unit 63 is mounted as a part of the symbol display unit 61.

  The main controller unit 62 includes a mount 64 and a main controller 65, and the mount 64 is installed on the back of the game board 23 in a state where the main controller 65 is installed on the installation surface of the mount 64. Has been. The main control device 65 is configured such that a main control board that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board that monitors the occurrence of a power failure are accommodated in a substrate box 66 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

  Incidentally, the substrate box 66 may be provided with a trace structure for providing a trace means for leaving the trace of the opening or for leaving a trace of the release. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 66 are joined in a separable manner, and a construction of a joining portion (crimping portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of the separation, or an adhesive layer is bonded when peeled off A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise the board | substrate box 66 can be considered.

  The sound emission control device unit 63 includes a mounting base 67 and a sound light emission control device 68. The mounting base 67 is a symbol display unit 61 in a state where the sound light emission control device 68 is installed on the installation surface of the mounting table 67. It is installed against the base. The voice light emission control device 68 includes a voice light emission control board that controls voice and light emission display and a display control apparatus to be described later according to an instruction from the main control device 65. The voice light emission control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 69 is configured to be accommodated.

  The back pack unit 17 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 15 including the main controller 65 and the sound emission controller 68. As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 17 includes a back pack 71, and a payout mechanism 72 and a control device assembly unit 73 are attached to the back pack 71. The back pack 71 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 74 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the sound emission control device 68 and the symbol display unit 61 from the rear. doing.

  The payout mechanism portion 72 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 74, and a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 75. A payout device 76 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper plate 57a or the lower plate 58a through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 72 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of AC 24 volts, for example, is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power supply is provided.

  The control device collective unit 73 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices and the like, and a game associated with the operation of the handle device 52 by the player A power supply and launch control device 78 that controls the launch of the ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 77 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Pattern display unit 61>
Next, the symbol display unit 61 will be described. In the following description, FIG. 5 will be referred to together with FIG. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the symbol display unit 61 viewed from the back side.

  The symbol display unit 61 includes a pair of front and rear front bases 81 and rear bases 82, a symbol display device 29 for displaying symbols (pictures) on the display surface 29a, and a display control device for controlling display of the symbol display device 29. 83, a drive mechanism 84 for moving the symbol display device 29, a movable object unit 85 that operates in accordance with the movement of the symbol display device 29, and heat radiation fans 86 and 87 for cooling the display control device 83, The sound emission control device unit 63 described above is provided. The symbol display device 29, the display control device 83, the drive mechanism 84, the movable object unit 85, the heat radiation fans 86 and 87, and the sound emission control device unit 63 are mounted on the rear base 82, and the rear base 82 is The front base 81 fixed to the back of the game board 23 is mounted and fixed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Pattern display device 29>
The symbol display device 29 is a 10.6 type liquid crystal display device. Here, the configuration of the symbol display device 29 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. 6 and 7 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the symbol display device 29. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the symbol display device 29 includes a TN liquid crystal display unit 91 in which liquid crystal is sealed between a pair of transparent substrates, and a polarizing film provided on each of the front and rear sides of the liquid crystal display unit 91. 92, a backlight 93 provided behind the rear polarizing film 92 so as to illuminate the entire back surface of the liquid crystal display unit 91 through the rear polarizing film 92, and the front polarizing film 92 and the liquid crystal display unit 91. And a parallax barrier panel 94 provided so as to face the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display unit 91. In this case, the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 is constituted by the front surface of the polarizing film 92 on the front side, but a protective part such as a colorless transparent protective film or a colorless transparent protective panel is provided in front of the polarizing film 92, You may comprise the display surface 29a of the symbol display apparatus 29 by the front surface of the said protection part. The display surface 29a is formed in a planar shape that is flush with the entire surface or substantially the entire surface.

  The liquid crystal display unit 91 has 1280 pixels in the horizontal direction and 768 pixels in the vertical direction, and has a total number of pixels (number of pixels or dots) of 1280 × 768. However, the number of pixels is limited to this. The number of pixels in the vertical direction may be another even number, the number of pixels in the horizontal direction may be another even number, and at least one of the number of pixels in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction may be used. May be an odd number. Further, the liquid crystal display unit 91 is not limited to the TN type, and for example, an ASV type may be used. Further, the position of the parallax barrier panel 94 may be arranged in front of the front polarizing film 92 as long as it functions as a parallax barrier. In this case, the symbol display device is arranged on the front surface of the parallax barrier panel 94. 29 display surfaces 29a are formed. Further, the parallax barrier panel 94 may be disposed between the liquid crystal display unit 91 and the rear polarizing film 92, or may be disposed between the rear polarizing film 92 and the backlight 93. In addition, a control board provided with an image processing device or the like is mounted behind the backlight 93 in the symbol display device 29.

  The symbol display device 29 can perform multi-view display, specifically dual view display, by adjusting the viewing angle by the display control mode of the liquid crystal display unit 91 by the display control device 83 and the parallax barrier panel 94. Is configured to do.

  Here, a specific configuration in which the viewing angle is adjusted in the symbol display device 29 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 7A and 7B. For convenience of explanation, in FIG. 7B, the thickness of the liquid crystal sealing portion of the liquid crystal display unit 91 is shown larger than the actual one. The same applies to the drawings other than FIG. 7B showing the liquid crystal display unit.

  In the liquid crystal display unit 91, as shown in FIG. 7A, a horizontal line region is constituted by unit pixel regions (regions for one pixel) 95 arranged in a line in the horizontal direction. In this case, it can be considered that a large number of horizontal line regions having a width corresponding to the vertical size of the unit pixel region 95 are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction. A large number of these horizontal line regions arranged in parallel in the vertical direction are assigned to the upper display region 96 and the lower display region 97 when performing dual view display. The upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 are set so as to be alternately arranged in units of one pixel in the vertical direction.

  A parallax barrier panel 94 is provided so as to adjust the viewing angles of the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97. As shown in FIG. 7B, the parallax barrier panel 94 is formed of a colorless and transparent glass plate, and is disposed so as to be parallel to the liquid crystal display unit 91. The parallax barrier panel 94 is vapor-deposited with a light shielding material, and a light shielding layer 98 that blocks light is formed. Although a carbon-containing material is used as a material for forming the light shielding layer 98, any material can be used as long as the light shielding layer 98 can be formed. The light shielding layers 98 are formed at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and between these light shielding layers 98 are transmissive layers 99 that transmit light.

  Each of the light shielding layers 98 and each of the transmissive layers 99 is linearly formed in the horizontal direction so as to correspond to the upper display region 96 and the lower display region 97 of the liquid crystal display unit 91, and alternately arranged in the vertical direction. Is formed. Each of the light shielding layers 98 and each of the transmission layers 99 has substantially the same width in the vertical direction as the width in the vertical direction of the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 of the liquid crystal display unit 91. When the display surface 29a is viewed from the upper side in a state where the symbol display device 29 is erected in the vertical direction, the upper display region 96 of the upper display region 96 and the lower display region 97 can be viewed, Shading with respect to the arrangement positions of the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 so that the lower display area 97 of the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 is visible when viewed from the lower side. The arrangement positions of the layer 98 and the transmissive layer 99 are set.

  In this case, an incident angle range in which the upper display area 96 is visible when the display surface 29a is viewed from the upper side, and a lower display area 97 when the display surface 29a is viewed from the lower side. As for the range of the incident angle that makes it possible to visually recognize, the former is “25 ° to 55 °” and the latter is “−55 ° to −15 °”. A specific range is arbitrary as long as each display of the multi-view display described later on the device 29 can be visually recognized well from a predetermined position in front of the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, the liquid crystal display unit 91 is controlled so that the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 are alternately arranged in units of one pixel in the vertical direction, so that the lower display area 97 is interposed therebetween. The distance between the adjacent upper display areas 96 and the distance between the adjacent lower display areas 97 across the upper display area 96 can be suppressed to one pixel. Thus, in the configuration that enables multi-view display in the symbol display device 29, each image that can be viewed from different directions is displayed over the entire display surface 29a, and each image is displayed in the vertical direction. It is possible to make the blank generated between the pixels inconspicuous as much as possible.

  Here, the image means that a predetermined character is displayed on the background. In this case, a character may be included in the background. The predetermined character includes an effect character displayed at the time of displaying a notice, and also includes a symbol used to notify a game result such as whether or not the game is being executed and whether or not the jackpot is won or the jackpot type. It is.

  A display control device 83 is provided behind the symbol display device 29 as shown in FIG. The display control device 83 includes a display control board that controls display of the symbol display device 29 based on information (command) input from the sound emission control device 68, and a board box 101 that houses the display control board. . The substrate box 101 is formed of a synthetic resin material having transparency so that the display control substrate accommodated can be visually recognized from the outside. The display control device 83 is fixed to the rear surface of the symbol display device 29 so as to be detachable, whereby the symbol display device 29 and the display control device 83 are integrated.

<Configuration related to rotation of symbol display device 29>
The symbol display device 29 in which the display control device 83 is integrated is rotatably supported by the rear base 82. Here, a configuration in which the symbol display device 29 is rotatably supported by the rear base 82 will be described with reference to FIG. 8 in addition to FIG. FIG. 8 is a side view of the game board 23 viewed from the right side for explaining the inside of the rear base 82, and the right side portions of the front base 81 and the rear base 82 are omitted for convenience of explanation.

  The rear base 82 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as an acrylic resin. However, it is not essential that the rear base 82 be formed to be colorless and transparent, and a component that is formed to be colored and transparent and is mounted on the front side of the rear base 82 can be viewed through the rear base 82. It is good also as a structure which makes it opaque and cannot visually recognize. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 8, the rear base 82 includes a bulging portion 103 that forms a receiving space 102 that is recessed from the front side to the back side and that is open at least forward.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the bulging portion 103 is a plate-shaped ceiling formed by being inclined downward from the upper region of the peripheral portion 104 integrally formed around the bulging portion 103 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. An inclined portion 105, a plate-like back surface portion 106 formed so as to be continuous with the rear edge of the ceiling inclined portion 105 in a vertical direction, specifically, a vertical direction, and a lower end and a peripheral edge of the back surface portion 106 Plate-shaped bottom inclined portion 107 formed to be inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be continuous with both lower regions of the portion 104, and each side wall constituting the left and right side surfaces of the bulging portion 103 Part 108 (see FIG. 5 for the side wall part 108).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 5, the bulging portion 103 is fitted with an opaque covering member 109 from the front side. The covering member 109 includes a part facing the part of the ceiling inclined part 105 on the accommodation space 102 side, a part facing the part of the back part 106 on the accommodation space 102 side, and both side wall parts. 108, the part which opposes in the accommodation space 102 side.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a pair of left and right side walls 108 is formed with a drive receiving portion 111 that protrudes to the side of the surrounding side surface. A shaft hole 112 extending in the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10 is formed so as to penetrate through. The shaft holes 112 are respectively formed in the left and right drive receiving portions 111, and the shaft holes 112 are arranged on the same axis.

  Corresponding to the shaft hole 112, the left and right side surfaces of the symbol display device 29 are respectively provided with shaft portions 113 projecting sideways. In this case, one of the shaft portions 113, specifically, the shaft portion 113 provided on the right side is integrally formed with the device side gear 114 fixed to the right side of the symbol display device 29. The pair of left and right shafts 113 are arranged so as to be on the same axis line in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 8, the position where each shaft portion 113 is provided is a position near the lower edge of the symbol display device 29, and more specifically, the vertical center and lower edge of the symbol display device 29. It is in the middle position. Further, the position where each shaft portion 113 is provided is a position closer to the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29. More specifically, the same position as the display surface 29a in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 or slightly more pachinko. The position is in front of the machine 10.

  The symbol display device 29 is disposed in the accommodation space 102 so that the left and right shaft portions 113 are inserted through the corresponding shaft holes 112, respectively. The shaft portions 113 that protrude outward from the housing space 102 to the drive receiving portion 111 are fixed to the shaft fixing member 115 from the outside, thereby preventing the shaft portions 113 from coming off from the shaft holes 112. The symbol display device 29 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the rear base 82. In this case, as shown in FIG. 5, a torsion coil spring 116 is provided in each of the left and right drive receiving portions 111 as a biasing means for preventing the collapse in a state where the corresponding shaft portion 113 is inserted. .

  Even if the torsion coil spring 116 is in a state in which the driving force of the display drive motor 121 described later is not applied at each rotation position of the symbol display device 29, the torsion coil spring 116 is integrally formed by the weight of the symbol display device 29 and the display control device 83. The urging force is applied so that does not move from the rotational position. However, the urging force is such that the integrated object is held at a predetermined rotational position, but the integrated object is not returned to the initial position.

  In addition, the structure for preventing the falling of the symbol display device 29 is not limited to the above-described one. For example, the symbol display device 29 in an upright state is prevented from falling toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A stopper member may be provided so that the symbol display device 29 tilted rearward of the pachinko machine 10 does not fall over a predetermined tilt limit position, which will be described later. The display drive motor 121 may be configured such that the output shaft of the display drive motor 121 is held at a rotational position with a predetermined force when not energized and the symbol display device 29 is held at the rotational position with the predetermined force.

  The symbol display device 29 supported so as to be rotatable is driven by the drive mechanism 84 to rotate. As shown in FIG. 5, the drive mechanism 84 includes a display drive motor 121 provided as an electric actuator for display and a plurality of drive side gears 122 to 124, and these display drive motor 121 and The drive side gears 122 to 124 are unitized by being supported by the support plate 125. The drive mechanism 84 is mounted on one of the left and right drive receiving portions 111 in the rear base 82, specifically, at a rear position of the right drive receiving portion 111. That is, the drive mechanism 84 is provided so as to apply a driving force to one shaft portion 113 of the symbol display device 29, specifically, the shaft portion 113 formed integrally with the device-side gear 114.

  The display drive motor 121 is a stepping motor having an output shaft 121a, and is mounted on the back surface of the rear base 82 so that the output shaft 121a protrudes laterally. The display drive motor 121 is electrically connected to the display control device 83 and receives the drive signal from the display control device 83 to rotate the output shaft 121a in a predetermined direction and in the opposite direction. . Incidentally, since the display drive motor 121 is mounted on the back surface of the rear base 82, the influence of heat generated during driving is prevented from reaching the space between the front base 81 and the rear base 82 as much as possible. Yes.

  A first drive side gear 122 is fixed to the output shaft 121a. The drive mechanism 84 includes a second drive side gear 123 and a third drive side gear 124 in addition to the first drive side gear 122. These first to third drive side gears 122 to 124 are shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, on the right side surface of the rear base 82, the first drive side gear 122 → the second drive side gear 123 → the third drive side gear 124 are arranged in parallel from the rear side to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, A gear train is formed. In this case, the central axes of the first to third drive side gears 124 are arranged on a straight line, and the straight lines are arranged so as to rise upward from the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 to the front side. The second driving gear 123 has two gears 123a and 123b having the same tooth pitch but different number of teeth arranged and fixed on the same axis, and these two gears 123a and 123b are integrated. Rotate. The third driving gear 124 also has two gears 124a and 124b having the same tooth pitch but different number of teeth arranged and fixed on the same axis, and these two gears 124a and 124b are integrated. Rotate. The first drive side gear 122 is meshed with the gear 123a having the larger number of teeth of the second drive side gear 123, and the gear 123b having the smaller number of teeth of the second drive side gear 123 is third. The drive side gear 124 is meshed with the gear 124a having the larger number of teeth.

  The first drive side gear 122 rotates with the rotation of the output shaft 121 a, and the rotational force of the first drive side gear 122 is transmitted to the third drive side gear 124 via the second drive side gear 123. The third drive side gear 124 is disposed at a position immediately behind the right drive receiving portion 111. As shown in FIG. 5, the drive receiving portion 111 is formed with an opening 126 for exposing the device side gear 114 toward the rear side. The device side gear 114 is shown in FIG. 8. As described above, the gear 124b having the smaller number of teeth in the third drive side gear 124 is engaged. As a result, the rotational force of the output shaft 121 a transmitted to the third drive side gear 124 via the first drive side gear 122 and the second drive side gear 123 becomes the device side gear 114 via the third drive side gear 124. The symbol display device 29 is rotated in accordance with the rotation of the device-side gear 114 by the rotational force, and the orientation of the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 is changed.

  Incidentally, while the first drive side gear 122 to the third drive side gear 124 are circular, the device side gear 114 is formed in a fan shape, and the shaft portion 113 is integrally formed at the center of the arc. Yes. Further, the number of teeth of the device side gear 114 and each of the drive side gears 122 to 124 is set so that the torque of the output shaft 121a is transmitted to the device side gear 114 in an increased state. Note that the number of gears is not limited to the above, and may be arbitrary. Further, the gear may be omitted, and the output shaft 121a of the display drive motor 121 may be directly connected to the shaft portion 113.

  The details of the orientation of the display surface 29a will be described later. As the display drive motor 121 is driven, the symbol display device 29 has an initial position where the display surface 29a is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 23 and faces the front. And a predetermined angle toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 around the lower shaft portion 113, specifically, the display surface 29a is 35 degrees toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the game board 23. The display surface 29a is switched to an inclined position where the display surface 29a faces obliquely upward. In this case, the accommodation space 102 of the rear base 82 has a predetermined depth as shown in FIG. 8, and when the symbol display device 29 is disposed at an inclined position, the symbol display device 29 and the display control device 83 are arranged. Does not come into contact with the back surface portion 106 of the bulging portion 103 (see FIG. 13B).

  Incidentally, the symbol display unit 61 is provided with a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the rotational position of the symbol display device 29, specifically, the initial position. Based on the detection result, it is determined whether or not the symbol display device 29 is arranged at the initial position, and the rotation control of the symbol display device 29 is executed based on the determination result.

<Movable object unit 85>
Next, the movable object unit 85 will be described. 9A is a perspective view of the movable object unit 85 viewed from the front side, FIG. 9B is a perspective view of the movable object unit 85 viewed from the back side, and FIG. 10 is a movable object unit 85 viewed from the front side. FIG. 11 is a front view of the movable object unit 85.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A, 9B and 10, the movable object unit 85 includes a support base 131, a reflection unit 132 supported so as to be slidable with respect to the support base 131, and a support base 131. On the other hand, a shutter unit 133 supported so as to be slidable, and a common drive mechanism 134 for operating the reflection unit 132 and the shutter unit 133 are provided.

  The reflection unit 132 includes a mirror unit 141. As shown in FIG. 10, the mirror unit 141 has a first reflecting mirror 142 having a first reflecting surface 142a formed on the surface and a second reflecting surface 143a having a smaller area than the first reflecting surface 142a. And a second frame part 145b corresponding to the second reflection mirror 143 and a first frame part 145a corresponding to the first reflection mirror 142 and a second frame part 145b corresponding to the second reflection mirror 143. An integrally formed frame forming member 145 is provided. Since the frame forming member 145 is attached to the mirror support member 144 from the front side, the members 144 and 145 are integrated.

  Both the first frame portion 145 a and the second frame portion 145 b are formed so that the front direction is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 23. A first reflection mirror 142 is disposed behind the first frame portion 145a. The first reflection mirror 142 has an upper edge that is in contact with or close to the back side of the upper frame of the first frame portion 145a, and a pachinko. The machine 10 is inclined downward toward the rear. Therefore, the 1st reflective surface 142a has become the state which faced diagonally downward. A second reflection mirror 143 is disposed behind the second frame portion 145b, and the upper edge of the second reflection mirror 143 is in contact with or close to the back side of the upper frame of the second frame portion 145b. At the same time, it is inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the 2nd reflective surface 143a has become the state which faced diagonally downward.

  Both the mirror support member 144 and the frame forming member 145 are formed so as not to block the lower side of the first reflection mirror 142 and the second reflection mirror 143. That is, when viewed as a single reflection unit 132, the first reflection surface 142a is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening of the first frame portion 145a and is also exposed to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the second reflecting surface 143a is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening of the second frame portion 145b, and is also exposed to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10.

  The mirror unit 141 is fixed to the mirror movable plate 146 via a mounting portion 144a integrally formed by protruding upward from the support portions of the first reflection mirror 142 and the second reflection mirror 143 in the mirror support member 144. . The mirror movable plate 146 is disposed between the support base 131 and the mirror unit 141, and a boss 146 a formed integrally with the back surface of the mirror movable plate 146 is longitudinal in the horizontal intermediate portion of the support base 131. It is arranged so as to be loosely inserted from the front side into the mirror slide groove 147 formed so as to extend in the direction. On the opposite side of the mirror movable plate 146 across the support base 131, there is provided a mirror retaining member 148 that fixes the boss 146a so as not to slip out of the mirror slide groove 147. However, the fixing by the mirror retaining member 148 is performed so as not to prevent the vertical movement of the movable mirror plate 146 along the mirror slide groove 147.

  By the way, the support base 131 has a plate-like base portion 131a and left and right edges standing forward from both left and right edges of the plate-like base portion 131a so that both left and right sides protrude toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 compared to the center side in the left-right direction. A pair of side wall portions 131b and a pair of left and right flange portions 131c that protrude outward from the front edge of each side wall portion 131b are provided. Among these parts, a mirror slide groove 147 is formed in the middle portion in the left-right direction of the plate-like base 131a.

  As the mirror movable plate 146 reciprocates in the vertical direction along the mirror slide groove 147, the mirror unit 141 reciprocates in the vertical direction. That is, the mirror unit 141 is mounted on the support base 131 so as to be able to reciprocate in the vertical direction. In this reciprocating range, the first reflection surface 142a and the entire second reflection surface 143a are disposed in the opening 35 for exposing the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 on the game board 23. The position and the retreat position moved upward from the position are included.

  The mirror unit 141 is disposed at the multi-display position in a state where the symbol display device 29 is disposed at the inclined position. As described above, the display surface 29 a of the symbol display device 29 can perform multi-view display, more specifically, dual view display. Further, the display surface 29 a is inclined as the display drive motor 121 is driven. It will be in a state of facing upward. In this case, the image (see FIG. 7B) displayed in the lower display area 97 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 is directly visible from the display surface 29a, but the image displayed in the upper display area 96 is displayed. Even if the surface 29a is directly confirmed, it cannot be visually recognized. On the other hand, the image displayed on the upper display area 96 is reflected by the first reflecting surface 142a and the second reflecting surface 143a, so that the image can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The manner in which this visual recognition becomes possible will be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the shutter unit 133 includes a shutter 151. The shutter 151 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape and has a shutter part 152 with a predetermined character decoration on the front surface, and a pair of left and right integrally formed by protruding upward from the upper edge of the shutter part 152. A mounting arm portion 153. The shutter 151 is disposed so as to sandwich the mirror unit 141 between the plate-like base portion 131a of the support base 131, and each mounting arm portion 153 is disposed so as to sandwich the mirror unit 141 therebetween.

  Each of the attachment arm portions 153 is fixed to the corresponding shutter movable plate 154. Each shutter movable plate 154 is disposed between the corresponding mounting arm portion 153 and the support base 131, and bosses 154 a formed on the back surface of the shutter movable plate 154 are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the support base 131. Are arranged so as to be loosely inserted from the front side in each of a pair of left and right shutter slide grooves 155 formed so as to extend in the direction. A shutter retaining member 156 for fixing the boss 154 a so that the boss 154 a does not escape from the shutter slide groove 155 is provided on the opposite side of each movable shutter plate 154 across the support base 131. However, the fixing by the shutter retaining member 156 is performed so as not to prevent the vertical movement of the shutter movable plates 154 along the shutter slide grooves 155.

  Each shutter slide groove 155 is formed in the left and right flange portions 131c of the support base 131. As shown in FIG. 9A, each shutter slide groove 155 is formed in each shutter movable plate 154 loosely inserted in the shutter slide groove 155. The fixed mounting arm portion 153 of the shutter 151 is set to protrude rearward so that the shutter portion 152 is arranged at a position where no interference with the mirror unit 141 occurs in front of the mirror unit 141. .

  As the shutter movable plate 154 reciprocates in the vertical direction along the shutter slide groove 155, the shutter 151 reciprocates in the vertical direction. That is, the shutter 151 is mounted on the support base 131 so as to be able to reciprocate in the vertical direction. The reciprocating range includes a closed position where the shutter portion 152 is disposed in the opening portion 35 for exposing the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 on the game board 23, and a retreat that is sunk upward from the opening portion 35. And location.

  The shutter 151 is disposed at the closed position in a state where the symbol display device 29 is disposed at the initial position. As already described, the symbol display device 29 is disposed at an inclined position for performing multi-view display, and in this situation, the mirror unit 141 is disposed at the multi-display position. In this case, the display surface 29a and the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a can be visually or entirely visible through the opening 35 in the multi-view display, while the display of the symbol display device 29 arranged at the initial position in the non-multi-view display. If the surface 29a is to be opposed to the entire opening 35, the display surface 29a needs to be enlarged. Then, the initial cost of the symbol display device 29 increases, and the amount of projection of the symbol display device 29 to the rear of the game board 23 increases at the inclined position. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, the vertical dimension of the opening 35 is set larger than the vertical dimension of the display surface 29a. However, in this configuration, although the above problem is solved, the upper edge of the opening 35 and the upper edge of the symbol display device 29 are separated in the vertical direction when the symbol display device 29 is arranged at the initial position. The

  On the other hand, when the symbol display device 29 is disposed at the initial position, the shutter 151 is disposed at the closed position. In addition, the shutter 152 has a horizontal dimension larger than the horizontal dimension of the opening 35, and the vertical dimension of the shutter display 152 and the opening of the symbol display device 29 arranged at the initial position. It is set to be larger than the distance dimension between the upper edge of the portion 35. Then, in the state where the shutter 151 is disposed at the closing position, the entire gap between the upper edge of the opening 35 and the upper edge of the symbol display device 29 is closed (see FIG. 3). Thereby, in the state where the symbol display device 29 is arranged at the initial position, the inside of the accommodation space 102 of the rear base 82 and the like from the gap between the upper edge of the opening 35 and the upper edge of the symbol display device 29 is pachinko. It can be prevented from being visible from the front of the machine 10.

  As described above, the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 are both slidable with respect to the support base 131. In this case, both the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 are driven to slide by the common drive mechanism 134. Hereinafter, the common drive mechanism 134 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the common drive mechanism 134 includes a common drive motor 161 provided as an electric actuator for movable means, and a plurality of common gears 162 to 164, and these common drive motors 161 and common gears 162 to 164 are unitized by being supported by the support base 131. The common drive motor 161 is a stepping motor having an output shaft 161a, and is fixed to the back surface of the support base 131 so that the output shaft 161a protrudes to the front side through an opening formed in the support base 131. The main body 161b of the common drive motor 161 protrudes to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the rear base 82 as shown in FIG. As a result, the influence of heat generation during driving does not reach the space between the front base 81 and the rear base 82 as much as possible.

  The common drive motor 161 is electrically connected to the display control device 83 and receives the drive signal from the display control device 83 to rotate the output shaft 161a in a predetermined direction and in the opposite direction. . The rotational force of the output shaft 161a is transmitted to the common gears 162 to 164. As shown in FIG. 11, the common gears 162 to 164 are supported by the support base 131 on the front side of the support base 131. In addition, a plurality of common gears 162 to 164 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the mirror unit 141 between the pair of left and right shutter retaining members 156 in the shutter unit 133, with the mirror movable plate 146 interposed therebetween, and The common gears 162 to 164 arranged on both the left and right sides are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to the movable mirror plate 146.

  That is, the common gears 162 to 164 are a pair of left and right inner common gears 162 arranged so as to sandwich the movable mirror plate 146 on the left and right sides, and a pair of left and right inner gears 162 arranged on both sides of the inner common gear 162. An intermediate common gear 163 and a pair of left and right outer common gears 164 arranged so as to sandwich the intermediate common gear 163 from side to side are provided. Thus, gear trains are formed on both the left and right sides of the mirror movable plate 146. Incidentally, each intermediate common gear 163 has a first intermediate common gear 163a and a second intermediate common gear 163b fixed on the same axis, and both gears 163a and 163b rotate integrally. .

  The mirror movable plate 146 disposed between the pair of left and right inner common gears 162 is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape, and a plurality of teeth in the longitudinal direction are formed on each of the pair of opposed long sides. It is installed side by side. The left tooth of the mirror movable plate 146 meshes with the teeth of the left inner common gear 162, and the right tooth of the mirror movable plate 146 meshes with the right inner common gear 162 teeth. In other words, the mirror movable plate 146 has a function as a rack, and each inner common gear 162 has a function as a pinion gear with respect to the mirror movable plate 146. Each of the inner common gears 162 meshes with the first intermediate common gear 163a of the adjacent intermediate common gear 163. Each of the second intermediate common gears 163b meshes with the adjacent outer common gear 164.

  Each shutter retaining member 156 disposed so as to sandwich the pair of left and right outer common gears 164 has a vertically long gear surface facing the adjacent outer common gear 164, A large number of teeth are juxtaposed in the vertical direction. Further, the side wall 131b of the support base 131 is interposed between each shutter retaining member 156 and the corresponding outer common gear 164. As shown in FIG. An opening 165 for exposing the teeth of the shutter retaining member 156 is formed toward the outer common gear 164 side. The teeth of the shutter retaining member 156 exposed through the opening 165 mesh with the teeth of the outer common gear 164. In other words, each shutter retaining member 156 has a function as a rack, and each outer common gear 164 has a function as a pinion gear with respect to each shutter retaining member 156.

  For each of the common gears 162 to 164, the output shaft 161a of the common drive motor 161 is fixed to one of the pair of inner common gears 162, specifically to the left inner common gear 162. The rotational force of the output shaft 161a is transmitted to the inner common gear 162, and the inner common gear 162 rotates. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, in order to distinguish the inner common gear 162 from the other inner common gear 162, the side on which the output shaft 161a is fixed is referred to as a drive source gear 162a. The different side is referred to as a non-drive source gear 162b.

  As the drive source gear 162a rotates, the mirror movable plate 146 slides upward or downward in accordance with the rotation direction, and the mirror movable plate 146 slides, so that the mirror unit 141 moves accordingly. Slide upward or downward. Further, the non-drive source gear 162b rotates as the mirror movable plate 146 slides upward or downward. In this case, since the non-drive source gear 162b is disposed on the opposite side of the drive source gear 162a with the mirror movable plate 146 interposed therebetween, the non-drive source gear 162b rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the drive source gear 162a.

  The intermediate common gear 163 rotates as the driving source gear 162a and the non-driving source gear 162b rotate, and the outer common gear 164 rotates as the intermediate common gear 163 rotates. Then, as the outer common gear 164 rotates, each shutter retaining member 156 slides upward or downward. In this case, as described above, the drive source gear 162a and the non-drive source gear 162b rotate so as to be opposite to each other, so that the pair of left and right intermediate common gears 163 are also rotated so as to be opposite to each other. At the same time, the pair of left and right outer common gears 164 also rotate in opposite directions. Accordingly, the shutter retaining members 156 move in the same direction, and the shutter retaining members 156 move in the same direction, so that the shutter 151 slides upward or downward in accordance with the movement.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the movable mirror plate 146 is engaged with the inner common gear 162 and the shutter retaining member 156 is engaged with the outer common gear 164, the outer common gear 162 and the outer common gear 162 are common. An intermediate common gear 163 is interposed between the intermediate gear 164. That is, in the configuration in which both the mirror movable plate 146 and the shutter retaining member 156 slide in the vertical direction, the mirror movable plate 146 and each shutter retaining member 156 rotate individually. There are an odd number of gears. Thus, when the output shaft 161a rotates, each outer common gear 164 rotates in the same direction as the corresponding inner common gear 162, so that the mirror movable plate 146 and each shutter retaining member 156 are mutually connected. Slide in the opposite direction. Therefore, when the mirror unit 141 slides upward, the shutter 151 slides downward, and when the mirror unit 141 slides downward, the shutter 151 slides upward.

  Incidentally, each of the common gears 162 to 164 has the same tooth pitch, and the number of teeth is equal to the inner common gear 162 = the outer common gear 164 <the second intermediate common gear 163b <the first intermediate. The relationship is the common gear 163a. Therefore, the torque is increased in the outer common gear 164 with respect to the torque of the output shaft 161a.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the vertical positional relationship between the mirror movable plate 146 and each shutter retaining member 156 is such that the teeth of the upper end portion of the mirror movable plate 146 mesh with the teeth of the inner common gear 162. In this state, the teeth of the lower end portion of each shutter retaining member 156 mesh with the teeth of each outer common gear 164. Further, by setting the number of teeth of each of the common gears 162 to 164, the upper end of each shutter retaining member 156 in the state where the teeth of the lower end portion of the movable plate for mirror 146 meshes with the teeth of each of the inner common gears 162. The teeth of the portion are configured to mesh with the teeth of each outer common gear 164. The positional relationship between the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG.

  12A-1 and 12B-1 are front views of the movable object unit 85, and FIGS. 12A-2 and 12B-2 are side views of the movable object unit 85. FIG. Also, the positional relationship between the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 is different between FIGS. 12A-1 and 12A-2 and FIGS. 12B-1 and 12B-2.

  In FIGS. 12A-1 and 12A-2, the mirror unit 141 is arranged at the upper limit position. This position is the retracted position of the mirror unit 141 already described. As already described, in the state where the teeth of the lower end portion of the movable mirror plate 146 are engaged with the teeth of the inner common gear 162, the teeth of the upper end portion of each shutter retaining member 156 are the outer common gears 164. Therefore, the shutter 151 is disposed at the lower limit position. This position is the closing position of the shutter 151 already described.

  In FIGS. 12B-1 and 12B-2, the mirror unit 141 is disposed at the lower limit position. This position is the multi-display position of the mirror unit 141 already described. As already described, in a state where the teeth of the upper end portion of the mirror movable plate 146 mesh with the teeth of the inner common gear 162, the teeth of the lower end portion of each shutter retaining member 156 are the outer common gears 164. Therefore, the shutter 151 is disposed at the upper limit position. This position is the retracted position of the shutter 151 already described.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, an optical state detection sensor 166 for detecting the operation state of the movable object unit 85 is vertically spaced apart from the two flange portions 131c of the support base 131. One is provided. The shutter retaining member 156 blocks the detection unit of the upper state detection sensor 166 when the shutter 151 is disposed at the retracted position, and the lower state when the shutter 151 is disposed at the closed position. A detection target part 167 that blocks the detection part of the detection sensor 166 is provided. The state detection sensor 166 is electrically connected to the display control device 83, and the display control device 83 can grasp the operation state of the movable object unit 85 based on the detection result of the state detection sensor 166.

  Incidentally, the state detection sensor 166 may not be provided so as to detect the position of the shutter 151 but may be provided so as to detect the position of the mirror unit 141. Further, a state detection sensor may be provided for each of the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151. Further, instead of a configuration in which the movement amount between the positions in the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 is the same or substantially the same, in a configuration in which either one of the movement amounts is set to be large, the movement amount is increased. On the other hand, a state detection sensor may be provided. In this case, the positions of the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 can be accurately detected as compared with the configuration in which the state detection sensor is provided on the side where the movement amount is small.

  Here, in the configuration in which both the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 slide in the vertical direction by the driving force of the single common drive motor 161 as described above, the mirror unit 141 is interposed by the common gears 162 to 164. The direction of sliding movement between the shutter 151 and the shutter 151 is opposite. Therefore, the weight load of the mirror unit 141 acts in a direction to cancel the weight load of the shutter 151, and the weight load of the shutter 151 acts in a direction to cancel the weight load of the mirror unit 141. As a result, the driving force required for the common drive motor 161 can be reduced while utilizing the weight load of the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151. Accordingly, the common drive motor 161 can be reduced in size.

  Further, in the configuration in which the shutter retaining member 156 is provided on both the left and right sides, and the mirror movable plate 146 is provided at the center in the left and right direction, the output shaft 161a of the common drive motor 161 is for the inside common use. It is fixed to one of the gears 162. Thereby, the weight load of the mirror unit 141 applied to the output shaft 161a and the weight load of the shutter 151 applied to the output shaft 161a are equalized or substantially equalized. Therefore, in the output shaft 161a, the weight load of the mirror unit 141 and the weight load of the shutter 151 are canceled each other, and the driving force necessary for the common drive motor 161 can be reduced.

  The movable object unit 85 configured as described above is screwed to the rear base 82 through the flange portion 131c of the support base 131 so that the shutter 151 is on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and the support base 131 is on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. Yes. In this case, both the front surface of the shutter unit 152 and the front surface of the mirror unit 141 face the front of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, in the movable object unit 85, the support base 131 on which the common drive motor 161 and the common gears 162 to 164 are mounted to form the drive region, the mirror unit 141, and the shutter 151 are the shutter from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is arranged in the order of 151 → mirror unit 141 → support base 131. Accordingly, it is possible to arrange the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 closer to the player's viewpoint than the support base 131 while increasing the size of the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151.

  Although illustration is omitted, a light emitting substrate having a light emitting body such as an LED is mounted on the back surface of the shutter 151, and light is emitted from the light emitting body toward the shutter 151, so that the light is emitted from the shutter. 151 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the light emitting board is electrically connected to the sound emission control device 68, and the light emission control device 68 outputs a drive signal, and the light is emitted. A signal line for electrically connecting the light emission substrate and the sound emission control device 68 through a wiring hole 169 (see FIG. 4) formed in a portion covering the movable object unit 85 in the rear base 82. (Not shown) is provided. However, since the shutter 151 is configured to reciprocate up and down as described above, the size of the wiring hole 169 is set so that the signal line can follow during the reciprocation.

<Operational positions of the symbol display device 29 and the movable object unit 85>
Next, the relationship between the operation positions of the symbol display device 29 and the movable object unit 85 will be described. 13A and 13B are side views of the game board 23 viewed from the right side, and the right side portions of the front base 81 and the rear base 82 are omitted for convenience of explanation. FIGS. 14A and 14B are front views of the game board 23.

  FIG. 13A and FIG. 14A show a state in which the symbol display device 29 is arranged at the initial position. In this state, the movable object unit 85 is used to fill a gap between the upper edge of the opening 35 for exposing the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 and the upper edge of the symbol display device 29 on the game board 23. The shutter 151 is disposed at the closed position. In this case, as shown in FIG. 13A, the shutter portion 152 of the shutter 151 has a lower edge portion facing the display surface 29a in the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in front of the display surface 29a and the upper portion thereof. The edge portion is located above the upper edge of the opening 35. Incidentally, the above state corresponds to the initial state (or non-multi display state) of the symbol display unit 61.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13A, the mirror unit 141 is disposed at a retracted position that is retracted above the symbol display device 29 so as not to interfere with the symbol display device 29. In this case, although the lower edge of the mirror unit 141 is located below the upper edge of the opening 35, the mirror unit 141 is arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the shutter 152, and FIG. ), The mirror unit 141 is not visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIGS. 13B and 14B show a state in which the symbol display device 29 is arranged at an inclined position. In this case, the shutter 151 is disposed at the retracted position so that the shutter portion 152 is in a state of being sunk upward from the opening 35. Instead, the mirror unit 141 slides downward, and the mirror unit 141 is disposed at the multi-display position in which the entire first reflection surface 142a and the second reflection surface 143a are disposed in the opening 35. . Incidentally, the above state corresponds to the multi-display state of the symbol display unit 61.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, the position where the mirror unit 141 is arranged is vertically above the display surface 29a, and the lower edge side of the mirror unit 141 is a pachinko machine with respect to the upper edge side of the display surface 29a. 10 is opposed to the upper edge side of the display surface 29a in the front-rear direction. In this case, both of the first reflecting surface 142a and the second reflecting surface 143a are arranged at positions above the intermediate portion in the vertical and horizontal directions on the display surface 29a. In other words, the range in which the first reflecting surface 142a and the second reflecting surface 143a are projected downward (specifically vertically downward) is an area in the middle of the vertical and horizontal directions on the display surface 29a. This region does not include the edge of the display surface 29a. In addition, both the first reflection surface 142a and the second reflection surface 143a are perpendicular to or substantially perpendicular to the display surface 29a.

  Here, the area occupied by the mirror unit 141 above the display surface 29a is not the entire area of the gap between the upper edge of the opening 35 and the display surface 29a, as shown in FIG. A gap is formed between the opening 35 and the left side of the first reflecting surface 142a and the upper side of the second reflecting surface 143a. In this case, the accommodation space 102 defined by the bulging portion 103 of the rear base 82 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the gap, but is already visible on the peripheral surface of the accommodation space 102 at a location where it can be seen. The described covering member 109 is attached. The covering member 109 is opaque and has a predetermined decoration on its surface. This prevents the rear part from being visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the part that defines the bulging part 103 in the multi-display state and the colorless and transparent bulging part 103.

  The rotation axis of the symbol display device 29 is at a position below the symbol display device 29 but above the lower edge. Therefore, in the state where the symbol display device 29 is arranged at the inclined position, as shown in FIG. 13B, the area below the rotation axis in the symbol display device 29 is more pachinko than in the initial position. Displace to the front side of machine 10. Thereby, the amount by which the symbol display device 29 protrudes to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 at the inclined position is suppressed. Further, in the symbol display device 29, the amount of protrusion of the area below the rotation axis to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided so that the lower area closes the game board 23 and the opening 35 of the game board 23. The transparent panel 168 is set so as not to interfere.

  Incidentally, although the transparent panel 168 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material, it may be formed of a colorless and transparent glass material. Through the transparent panel 168, the display surface 29a and the reflecting surfaces 142a, 142a, As long as 143a is visible, it may be colored and transparent. By providing the transparent panel 168, it is possible to prevent a game ball flowing down the game area from entering the symbol display device 29 side through the opening 35. The transparent panel 168 is formed in a plate shape having the same or substantially the same thickness dimension, and the plate surface is parallel or substantially parallel to the window panel 54 constituting the board surface of the game board 23 or the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. It has become.

<Relationship Between Each State of Symbol Display Unit 61 and Image Display Mode>
Next, the relationship between each state of the symbol display unit 61 and the image display mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image display mode in an initial state, and FIGS. 15B and 15C are explanatory diagrams for explaining an image display mode in a multi-display state. In the following description, the player is viewing the opening 35 from the front.

  In the initial state, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), the display surface 29a is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 23, and substantially the entire display surface 29a excluding a part of each end in the vertical direction is It faces the transparent panel 168 that closes the opening 35 of the game board 23 at the rear. The player's line of sight is directed perpendicular to the display surface 29a. In a situation where the player's line of sight is directed vertically with respect to the display surface 29a, even if the multi-view display is performed on the display surface 29a, each image of the multi-view display is not visually recognized individually. Since the image is visually recognized in a mixed state, the multi-view display is not performed.

  As already described, in the movable object unit 85, the shutter 151 is disposed at the closed position, and the mirror unit 141 is disposed at the retracted position.

  In the multi-display state, as shown in FIGS. 15B and 15C, the display surface 29 a is inclined with respect to the game board 23 as a multi-use inclination angle by 35 degrees. Further, in the movable object unit 85, the mirror unit 141 is disposed at the multi-display position instead of the shutter 151 being disposed at the retracted position. In this case, as shown in FIG. 15B, the angle of the first reflecting surface 142a with respect to the display surface 29a is a right angle or a substantially right angle, and as shown in FIG. The angle of the two reflecting surfaces 143a is a right angle or a substantially right angle. In this state, not only the display surface 29a but also the first reflecting surface 142a and the second reflecting surface 143a can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the transparent panel 168.

  In addition, the height positions of the lower ends of the first reflecting surface 142a and the second reflecting surface 143a are the same as or slightly lower than the height position of the upper edge of the display surface 29a. In this case, when the display surface 29a and the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a are viewed through the transparent panel 168, the display surface 29a and the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a are visually recognized as having no vertical gap.

  The incident angle of the player's line of sight with respect to the display surface 29a is 35 degrees wider than in the initial state. In addition, the incident angle of the player's line of sight with respect to each of the reflective surfaces 142a and 143a is also 35 degrees, and at this angle, a part of the display surface 29a is projected on each of the reflective surfaces 142a and 143a. In this situation, multi-view display is performed on the display surface 29a, so that an image displayed in the lower display area 97 (see FIG. 7B) of the liquid crystal display unit 91 is directed directly toward the display surface 29a. And an image displayed in the upper display area 96 (see FIG. 7B) of the liquid crystal display unit 91 is visually recognized by the line of sight directed toward the respective reflective surfaces 142a and 143a. That is, with respect to the display surface 29a, an image that cannot be directly viewed from the opening 35 side among an image when the display surface 29a is viewed obliquely from below and an image when the display surface 29a is viewed obliquely from above. Since the light is reflected by the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a, it can be viewed from the opening 35 side.

  In addition, as described above, the angle of each of the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a with respect to the display surface 29a is a right angle or a substantially right angle, so that the image on the display surface 29a is viewed by being reflected by the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a. When the player's line of sight is extended to the rear of each reflection surface 142a, 143a by the distance traveled by the light from each reflection surface 142a, 143a to the display surface 29a in the line of sight line, the extended position is the surface of the display surface 29a. It is included in the surface extended upward in a unified state. That is, when viewed from the player, the image reflected by each of the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a is viewed so that the display surface 29a is displayed at a position extended upward on the same plane. In this case, the vertical dimension of the display area that is substantially visually recognized by the player is larger than the vertical dimension of the opening 35.

  As described above, the first reflective surface 142a is installed behind the first frame portion 145a, and the second reflective surface 143a is installed behind the second frame portion 145b. Then, in the multi-display state, the player recognizes that there are a plurality of display units in a state of being spatially separated in addition to the display surface 29a. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that there are a plurality of spatially independent display units while using a single display device, and the configuration of the display units can be diversified.

  Here, how the player views the multi-view display from a predetermined position in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the multi-display state will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 16, only the first reflecting surface 142a is shown among the first reflecting surface 142a and the second reflecting surface 143a, but the second reflecting surface 143a is the same as the first reflecting surface 142a.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the player can visually recognize the display surface 29 a and the first reflective surface 142 a through the window panel 54 and the transparent panel 168 by visually recognizing the window panel 54 from a predetermined position. Then, the incident angle of the player's line of sight with respect to the display surface 29a is included in the incident angle range in which the lower display area 97 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 is visible, so that in the lower display area 97 The displayed image becomes visible. On the other hand, since the upper display region 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 is not included in the range of the incident angle that allows viewing, the image in the upper display region 96 cannot be viewed even when the display surface 29a is viewed. .

  When the incident angle of the player's line of sight with respect to the first reflecting surface 142a is specified as the incident angle on the display surface 29a reflected by the first reflecting surface 142a, the upper display area 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 described above. Is included in the range of the incident angle that allows the image to be visually recognized, the image displayed in the upper display area 96 can be visually recognized through the first reflecting surface 142a. On the other hand, the lower display area 97 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 described above is not included in the range of the incident angle that makes it visible, so that even if the first reflective surface 142a is viewed, the image in the lower display area 97 is visually recognized. I can't do it.

  As described above, the images in the display areas 96 and 97 are visually recognized from the predetermined position in front of the pachinko machine 10, one is directly visible from the display surface 29a, and the other is visually recognized through the first reflecting surface 142a. . Note that the predetermined position is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 16, and is arbitrary as long as the multi-view display can be satisfactorily viewed through the display surface 29a and the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a.

  As described above, in the multi-display state, the symbol display device 29 is arranged so that the display surface 29a is inclined upward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and the reflective surfaces 142a, 142a, By arranging the mirror unit 141 so that 143a is inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to secure a larger display area than the opening 35, and as a result, the opening 35 It is possible to secure a relatively large display area without increasing the size. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the size in the front-rear direction of the symbol display unit 61 in a state in which a large display area is secured as compared with the opening 35.

  Incidentally, in the configuration in which multi-view display is performed as described above, the luminance when the display surface 29a is directly viewed from the front of the window panel 54 in the multi-display state, and the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a from the front of the window panel 54. The parallax barrier panel 94 may be formed so that the brightness when viewing what is projected at is the same. Specifically, with the display surface 29a as a reference, the luminance when the upper display region 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 is viewed from an obliquely upper position of 35 degrees and the lower display area 97 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 are inclined by 35 degrees. When compared with the brightness when viewed from below, the parallax barrier panel 94 is formed so that the former brightness is higher, and the brightness difference is reflected by the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a. Is set to be approximately the same as the amount of decrease in luminance. As a result, a difference in luminance is less likely to occur between the image when the display surface 29a is directly visually recognized and the image reflected by the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a. It is possible to visually recognize the image without any sense of incongruity.

<Sound Emission Control Device Unit 63 and Heat Dissipation Fans 86 and 87>
Next, the sound emission control device unit 63 and the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 will be described. FIG. 17 is a side view of the periphery of the symbol display unit 61 in the game board 23 as viewed from the right side, and the right side portions of the front base 81 and the rear base 82 and the drive mechanism 84 are omitted for convenience of explanation. . FIG. 17A shows a state in which the symbol display device 29 is arranged at the initial position, while FIG. 17C shows a state in which the symbol display device 29 is arranged at the inclined position. .

  As already described, the bulging portion 103 of the rear base 82 that forms the accommodation space 102 that accommodates the symbol display device 29 in which the display control device 83 is integrated includes the ceiling inclined portion 105 and the back surface portion 106. And a bottom inclined portion 107. As described above, the symbol display device 29 in which the display control device 83 is integrated rotates between the initial position and the inclined position, but the accommodation space 102 is sized to allow the rotation. Is set.

  The sound emission control device unit 63 is mounted on the back surface of the ceiling inclined portion 105. As described above, the sound emission control device unit 63 includes the mounting base 67 and the sound light emission control device 68, and is installed so that the installation surface is parallel or substantially parallel to the inclination of the back surface of the ceiling inclined portion 105. Since the base 67 is fixed, the front surface of the sound emission control device 68 is also parallel or substantially parallel to the inclination of the back surface of the ceiling inclined portion 105. In this case, the upper end side of the sound emission control device 68 is lined up forward and backward behind the common drive motor 161 constituting the movable object unit 85. Since the sound emission control device unit 63 is arranged as described above, the internal space of the pachinko machine 10 is suppressed while suppressing interference with the common drive motor 161 constituting the movable object unit 85 and the back pack unit 17 (not shown). It is possible to secure an installation space for the sound emission control device unit 63 by effectively utilizing the above.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 17B, a ceiling side air hole 171 is formed in the ceiling inclined portion 105. The area in which the ceiling side vent hole 171 is formed is included in the area in which the sound emission control device unit 63 is mounted, but the mounting base 67 has a predetermined thickness dimension and the sound emission. On the side opposite to the installation surface 172 of the control device 68, the ceiling inclined portion 105 and an open space 173 opened at the upper side surface are formed, and the entire ceiling side vent hole 171 is closed by the mounting base 67. Absent. Furthermore, the covering member 109 is mounted on the front side of the ceiling inclined portion 105 as described above, but the covering member 109 is formed so as not to block the entire ceiling side air hole 171. Therefore, the accommodation space 102 in which the symbol display device 29 is accommodated is opened to the outside of the rear base 82 through the ceiling side vent hole 171 and the open space 173.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 17C, a bottom side air hole 174 is formed in the bottom inclined portion 107. A plurality of the bottom side air holes 174 are formed in a separated state. In a region where the bottom side air vent 174 is formed in the bottom inclined portion 107, a plurality of heat radiation fans 86 and 87 are installed from the back side of the bottom inclined portion 107. In this case, the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 are provided in the extended region of the air blowing surface of the heat radiating fans 86 and 87, regardless of the position of the symbol display device 29 in which the display control device 83 is integrated. It arrange | positions so that at least one part of the display control apparatus 83 may be included.

  As shown in FIG. 17C, each of the heat dissipating fans 86 and 87 has a configuration in which an impeller 176 is installed in a fan case 175, and while the drive signal is output from the sound emission control device 68, The motor 177 operates and the impeller 176 rotates. In addition, although the magnitude | size of the impeller 176 differs mutually so that the airflow volume may differ, the some heat radiating fans 86 and 87 are not limited to this, You may be the same. Moreover, although the several heat radiating fans 86 and 87 are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, they may be juxtaposed in the vertical direction. Further, the number of the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 is not limited to two, but may be three or more or a single number.

  By rotating the impeller 176, outside air is taken into the accommodation space 102 from the bottom side air hole 174, and the outside air is blown to the display control device 83. In addition, when the outside air is taken in, the air in the accommodation space 102 is discharged from the ceiling side vent hole 171. That is, the bottom side vent hole 174 functions as an intake port in the accommodation space 102, and the ceiling side vent hole 171 functions as an exhaust port in the accommodation space 102. When air flows from the bottom side vent hole 174 to the ceiling side vent hole 171, the air heated by the symbol display device 29 and the display control device 83 can be discharged well outside the accommodation space 102.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 17C, the display control device 83 includes a display CPU 182 that executes image drawing instruction processing and a VDP 183 that executes drawing processing on the symbol display device 29 based on the drawing instructions of the display CPU 182. At least a display control board 181 mounted is provided, and the display CPU 182 and the VDP 183 generate heat when display control of the symbol display device 29 is executed. On the other hand, by performing the ventilation with respect to the accommodation space 102 through the heat radiation fans 86 and 87 as described above, the heat radiation in the accommodation space 102 can be favorably performed.

  As already described, the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 are not integrated with the display control device 83 but are fixed to the rear base 82. In order to dissipate heat from the display control device 83, a configuration in which the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 are integrated with the display control device 83 is also assumed. In this case, the total weight of the integrated body of the symbol display device 29 and the display control device 83 is The weight of the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 will increase. If it does so, the weight load concerning the rotating shaft of the symbol display apparatus 29 and the output shaft 121a of the display drive motor 121 will increase. On the other hand, since the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 are fixed to the rear base 82 that does not move integrally with the symbol display device 29, the rotation shaft of the symbol display device 29 and the output shaft of the display drive motor 121. While suppressing the weight load applied to 121a, the heat radiation of the display control device 83 can be performed satisfactorily.

  In the multi-display state of the symbol display unit 61, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 17A, the symbol display device 29 in which the display control device 83 is integrated is arranged at an inclined position. In this case, in the substrate box 101 of the display control device 83, the surface plate portion 184 that faces the plate surface (or element mounting surface) of the display control substrate 181 on which the display CPU 182 and the VDP 183 are mounted is relative to the bottom inclined portion 107. While being parallel or substantially parallel, substantially the entire surface plate portion 184 faces the bottom inclined portion 107 at a position close thereto. As a result, in the multi-display state, the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 blow air toward the surface plate portion 184 at a position closer to the surface plate portion 184 than in the initial state. Therefore, the display control device 83 is more easily cooled in the multi-display state than in the initial state.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the front plate 184 has a vent 185 formed in a region facing the display CPU 182 and the VDP 183, and in the multi-display state, the vent 185 is formed. The region faces the bottom side air hole 174, that is, a position close to the heat radiating fans 86 and 87. Thus, in the multi-display state, air can be blown at a position close to the display CPU 182 and the VDP 183, and the cooling effect of the display CPU 182 and the VDP 183 is enhanced.

  In the multi-display state, as described later, a complicated drawing process is executed as compared with the initial state, so that the amount of heat generated in the display CPU 182 and the VDP 183 increases compared to the case of the initial state. On the other hand, the display CPU 182 and the VDP 183 are efficiently cooled by setting the positional relationship between the display control device 83 and the heat radiation fans 86 and 87 in the multi-display state as described above. Can do.

  Incidentally, even in the multi-display state of the symbol display unit 61, the display control device 83 is not in contact with the bulging portion 103, and the bottom side vent hole 174 and the ceiling side vent hole 171 communicate with each other through the accommodation space 102. State is maintained. Therefore, even in the multi-display state, the air flow between the air holes 171 and 174 is not completely blocked.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 192 is mounted on the main control board 191 provided in the main controller 65. The MPU 192 includes a ROM 193 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 192 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 193 is executed. A certain RAM 194 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated.

  The MPU 192 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the MPU 192 are a power failure monitoring board 195 provided in the main controller 65, a payout controller 77, and other switches (not shown). In this case, a power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 195, and power is supplied to the MPU 192 via the power failure monitoring board 195. Further, as a part of the switch group, a plurality of detection sensors provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the winning-corresponding ball entering portions such as the upper operating port 26, the lower operating port 27, and the variable winning device 25 are connected. In the MPU 192 of the main control device 65, a winning determination (entering determination) for the winning portion is performed. In addition, the MPU 192 executes a lottery occurrence lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on a winning to either the upper operation port 26 or the lower operation port 27, and also determines the reach occurrence lottery and display duration for each game time. A lottery is executed.

  Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 192 will be described.

  The MPU 192 uses various counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 31, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 29, setting of display of the accessory display unit 32, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot occurrence lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, and the symbol display Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the device 29 moves out and fluctuates, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, variation display on the main display unit 31 and the symbol display device 29 A variation type counter CS that determines time is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 27a of the lower operating port 27 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 196 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 194. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer 196, information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is acquired information when the winning to the upper working port 26 or the lower working port 27 occurs. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 197 as a means.

  The holding ball storage area 197 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 26 or the lower operating port 27. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 196 is stored in one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the upper operation port 26 or the lower operation port 27 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 26 or the lower operating port 27 are stored and stored. In addition, the holding area RE includes a holding number storage area NA, in order to identify the number in which the winning history to the upper operation port 26 or the lower operation port 27 is stored in the holding number storage area NA. Is stored.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 31, and at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, determination of whether or not is made is performed.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 197 of the RAM 194 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 26 or the lower operation port 27.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (a success / failure information group) in a success / failure table storage area as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 193. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 197 of the RAM 194 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 26 or the lower operation port 27.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are based on two conditions: (1) a winning / losing lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means after completion of the opening / closing execution mode; A plurality of jackpot results are set by making a difference in. As above-mentioned lottery mode, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as described above.

  As a support mode, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area, there is a frequency that the electric accessory 27a of the lower operation port 27 is opened per unit time. The low frequency support mode (the low frequency support state or the low frequency guide state) and the high frequency support mode (the high frequency support state or the high frequency guide state) are set so as to be relatively high and low.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 27a is opened when the electrified open state is selected is set more than in the low-frequency support mode. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 27a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a shorter time is selected as the reserved time that is secured after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low-frequency support mode. Is set to be.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the lower operation port 27 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper operating port 26 than to the lower operating port 27, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 27 is connected to the lower operating port 27. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower operating port 27, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability that it will be elected in the electric character open state in. In addition, a secured time (e.g., on the display part 32 for an accessory based on a winning to the through gate 28) that is secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, , One display continuation period in the accessory display unit 32 is shortened), and the average time of the secured time is shortened and the winning probability is increased, either one condition or any combination of conditions By applying, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 193. Then, a normal jackpot result (low probability special game result) and a probability variable jackpot result (high probability special game result) are set as the distribution destinations.

  The normal jackpot result is that the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the support frequency is high until the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the support mode shifts. It is a jackpot result that becomes a mode. After the end reference count has elapsed, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

  The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that.

  In the distribution table, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but this numerical distribution is arbitrary. In addition, the distribution destination of the jackpot result is not limited to the above two types. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode, a plurality of modes are set so that the expected value of the game ball is high and the opening / closing execution is performed. It is good also as a structure which increases the type of jackpot result rather than said two types by providing a difference in the mode transfer destination mode.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 29. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 29 that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (patterns), and the stop result after the variation display becomes the addition correspondence result in the game times that are in the opening / closing execution mode. In the gaming machine, in order to make the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to become the above-mentioned giving correspondence result before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 29 is started. The display state of

  Two types of expectation effects are set: the reach display, and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of a corresponding result at a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 29, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner is included in the column. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the notice display, the symbol display on the display surface of the symbol display device 29 is started in a state where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol sequences after the symbol variation display is started, or in some symbol sequences, a plurality of symbols are displayed. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on a symbol row the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also included. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode. In the game times that do not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing is referred to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 193 in response to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when On the other hand, whether or not to perform the notice display is determined not by the main controller 65 but by the display controller 83.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 192 determines the variation display time on the main display unit 31 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 29. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the start of variation display in the main display unit 31 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 29.

  As already described, in the MPU 192, at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the main display unit 31. In this determination, the MPU 192 is stored in the variation display time table storage area of the ROM 193. The variable display time table (information group for determining display continuation period) is used.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric combination reservation area 198 of the RAM 194 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 28. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 27a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

  The game time control process and the game state transition process in the MPU 192 using the counters and the reserved ball storage area 197 will be briefly described.

  The MPU 192 repeatedly executes a predetermined game progress process after the power is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, as the game progress process, the normal process that is repeatedly executed in the first period and the second period that is shorter than the first period are started, and are executed by interrupting the normal process. Timer interruption processing is set, but the specific processing configuration is arbitrary as long as the progress of the game can be controlled.

  As part of the game progression process, a game turn control process and a game state transition process are set. In the game times control process, the data shift process of the reserved ball storage area 197 is performed on the condition that the game information is not being executed or in the open / close execution mode and the hold information is held in the hold ball storage area 197. Is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 is shifted in order to the lower area side. In addition, when the data shift process is executed, a win / fail lottery process, a type determination process, and a game turn start process are executed.

  In the success / failure lottery process, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is determined by referring to the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 among the holding information shifted to the execution area AE and the success / failure lottery mode corresponding to the current success / failure lottery mode. judge. If it is a big win, a type determination process is further executed. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified with reference to the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 and the distribution table among the hold information shifted to the execution area AE.

  In the game round start process, whether or not a reach is generated even if the jackpot is not won by referring to the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 among the hold information shifted to the execution area AE and the reach table. Determine. In addition, in the game round start processing, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot winning, the type of jackpot and the presence / absence of reach is read from the ROM 193, and the read variable display time table and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing are read. The change display time of the current game time is determined from the numerical information. Then, in the game turn start process, the main display unit 31 starts the display of the variation of the pattern corresponding to the determined variation display time, the variation command including the variation display time information, A type command including information on the jackpot type is transmitted to the sound emission control device 68.

  By the way, the variable display time is determined by reading the variable display time table corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot, the type of jackpot, and the presence / absence of reach, so the change command includes information on the presence / absence of reach. It can be said that. Further, as will be described later, since the display control device 83 determines the type of reach display in accordance with the variable display time, it can be said that the variable command includes information on the reach type.

  Also, in the game times control process, the variable display process is executed while the game times are being executed, and when the variable display time determined in the change start process has elapsed, the main display unit 31 displays the game times. The change display of the picture is terminated in a state in which the stop result corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot winning and the type of jackpot is displayed. In addition, an end command for instructing the end of the game times is transmitted to the sound emission control device 68.

  In the gaming state transition process, when the game round corresponding to the big win is completed, the transition process to the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and the opening / closing process of the big winning opening 25a in the variable winning device 25 is started. Note that various commands for the opening / closing execution mode are transmitted to the sound emission control device 68 when starting the opening / closing execution mode, during the opening / closing execution mode, and when ending the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the success / failure lottery mode transition or the support mode transition is executed in correspondence with the jackpot type related to the game times that triggered the start of the mode.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 18, the power failure monitoring board 195, the payout control device 77, and the sound emission control device 68 are connected to the output side of the MPU 192. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 77 based on a winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning part. The sound emission control device 68 is transmitted with the game turn commands such as the change command, the type command, and the end command described above, and various commands for the open / close execution mode.

  Although not shown, the main display unit 31 and the accessory display unit 32 are connected to the output side of the MPU 192, and these display controls are executed. Although not shown, a drive unit provided in the variable winning device 25 is connected to the output side of the MPU 192. In the big hit state, drive control of the driving unit is executed, and the variable winning device 25 Opening and closing is executed. Although not shown in the figure, a driving portion provided on the electric accessory 27a of the lower operating port 27 is connected to the output side of the MPU 192, and the electric utility release lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is performed. When winning, opening / closing of the electric accessory 27a is executed.

  The power failure monitoring board 195 relays between the main control board 191 and the power source and launch control device 78, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source and launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout device 76 based on the award ball command received from the MPU 192 of the main control device 65 so as to pay out a winning ball or a rental ball.

  The power source and launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 191 and the payout control device 77, and the generated operating power is supplied. The power supply and launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 51, and the game ball launch mechanism 51 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 68 drives and controls the display lamp portion 55 and the speaker portion 56 provided on the front door frame 16 based on various commands received from the MPU 192 of the main control device 65. Further, various commands received from the MPU 192 of the main control device 65 are transmitted to the display control device 83 while maintaining the information form. The sound emission control device 68 is electrically connected to the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 of the symbol display unit 61. The sound emission control device 68 always outputs a drive signal to the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 during operation, so that air blowing by the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 is always performed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  The display control device 83 includes a display control board 181 on which a display CPU 182, a program ROM 201, a work RAM 202, a video display processor (VDP) 183, a character ROM 203 and a video RAM 204 are individually mounted as chips. In addition, you may form the chip | tip compositely with arbitrary combinations.

  The display CPU 182 of the display control board 181 is used for a game command (variation command, type command and end command) and an opening / closing execution mode transmitted from the main control device 65 and transmitted via the sound emission control device 68. In addition to receiving various commands, the received commands are analyzed, or predetermined calculation processing is performed based on the received commands, and drawing instruction processing (specifically, generation of internal commands for the VDP 183) is executed.

  Further, the display drive motor 121 and the common drive motor 161 of the symbol display unit 61 are electrically connected to the output side of the display control board 181. The display CPU 182 switches the symbol display unit 61 from the initial state to the multi display state by outputting a driving signal for switching the multi display (first switching signal) to each of the drive motors 121 and 161. By outputting a return drive signal (second switching signal) to each of the drive motors 121 and 161, the symbol display unit 61 is switched from the multi-display state to the initial state.

  Incidentally, a position detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the symbol display device 29 and a state detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the state of the movable object unit 85 are electrically provided on the input side of the display control board 181. It is connected to the. The display CPU 182 specifies the position of the symbol display device 29 based on the detection result of the position detection sensor, and arranges the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 in any position in the movable object unit 85 based on the detection result of the state detection sensor. Identify what is being done.

  The program ROM 201 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the display CPU 182 and fixed value data. In other words, the program ROM 201 is a memory used for read-only purposes when various controls are executed by the display CPU 182. The program ROM 201 is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply when storing stored information.

  The work RAM 202 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the display CPU 182 executes various programs. In other words, the work RAM 202 is a memory used for both writing and reading when various controls are executed by the display CPU 182. The work RAM 202 is a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold stored information.

  The VDP 183 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device 206 as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 29. Since the VDP 183 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 183 should be called a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 183 adjusts the respective timings of the display CPU 182 and the video RAM 204 to intervene in reading and writing data, and creates drawing data in the video RAM 204 using the image data read from the character ROM 203, and adds the created drawing data to the created drawing data. A corresponding image is displayed on the symbol display device 29.

  The character ROM 203 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 29, and is used for the purpose of reading only image data and stores it. This is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply when holding information. The character ROM 203 holds various display designs, character bitmap image data, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like as image data.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 203 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 203.

  The video RAM 204 is a memory for storing drawing data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 29, and the display content of the symbol display device 29 is changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 204. In other words, the video RAM 204 is used for both the purpose of writing and reading when displaying an image on the symbol display device 29, and is volatile that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a storage means.

  The video RAM 204 is provided with a cache area 211 and a drawing area 212. The cache area 211 is an area for storing image data read from the character ROM 203. The drawing area 212 processes the drawing data for one frame (unit time) on the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 at each drawing timing, and processes the image data read to the cache area 211. This is an area used when creating in the video RAM 204. The creation of the drawing data is executed by the VDP 183.

  The VDP 183 is electrically connected to the image processing device 206 provided in the symbol display device 29 through a drawing signal signal path (drawing signal transfer path) SC1. The drawing data created in the drawing area 212 is transferred to the image processing device 206 through the drawing signal path SC1.

  The VDP 183 is provided with a line buffer (not shown), and the line buffer is used when transferring data from the drawing area 212 to the image processing device 206. However, the line buffer may not be provided, and data may be directly transferred from the drawing area 212 to the image processing device 206.

  The image processing device 206 includes a device buffer 214. The drawing data transferred from the VDP 183 to the image processing device 206 is written in the device buffer 214. The image processing device 206 displays the predetermined image on the display surface 29 a by drawing the drawing data written in the device buffer 214 on the liquid crystal display unit 91. The configuration related to the transfer of the drawing data will be described in detail later.

<Processing by display CPU 182>
Next, various processes executed by the display CPU 182 will be described. The display CPU 182 is configured to repeatedly execute the display main process at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and a plurality of types of processes are set in the display main process. As a part of the plurality of types of processes, at least a change start process, a change end process, a jackpot presentation process, a drawing instruction process, a vibration process, and a multi-display process are included.

  In the variation start processing, when the variation command is received from the sound emission control device 68, the variation display time of the game time is determined from the content of the variation command and the content of the type command received at the same time. Is identified, and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped is identified based on the result of grasping the presence / absence of jackpot winning, the type of jackpot and the presence / absence of reach. Furthermore, based on the variation display time and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped, the variation display pattern of the symbols from the start of variation to the final stop is determined.

  Incidentally, the program ROM 201 stores a variable display time table for specifying the variable display time from the change command, and the work RAM 202 is an area for storing information on the specified variable display time. A measurement counter area that is updated so that the stored information is decremented by 1 every time the display main process is started is set. The display CPU 182 grasps the elapsed time of the game times based on the information stored in the measurement counter area.

  The program ROM 201 stores a stop result table for specifying a combination of symbols to be finally stopped from the contents of the change command and the type command, and information on the change display time and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped. A variation display pattern table for specifying a variation display pattern from the information is stored. The work RAM 202 has a variable display pattern area for storing information on the variable display pattern. The display CPU 182 stores the information stored in the measurement counter area and the variable display pattern area. In addition to specifying the drawing instruction timing, the contents of the drawing instruction at each drawing instruction timing are specified.

  In the variation end process, when the end command is received from the sound emission control device 68, the game times of this time are finally stopped while the combination of the final stop symbols determined in the variation start process is displayed. Next, a drawing instruction is executed to the VDP 183. In the big hit effect processing, when various commands for the opening / closing execution mode are received from the sound emission control device 68, the VDP 183 is displayed so that an image of the effect corresponding to each command is displayed on the display surface 29a. Execute drawing instructions.

  In the drawing instruction processing, the drawing instruction timing is determined based on the display pattern information read from the program ROM 201 and stored in the work RAM 202 and the measurement counter area information for measuring the elapsed time from a predetermined reference. It is determined whether or not. When it is determined that it is the drawing instruction timing, drawing instruction information corresponding to the timing is output to the VDP 183 as an internal command. Specifically, in the game instruction effect, in the drawing instruction process, the drawing instruction timing is based on the information of the variable display pattern stored in the work RAM 202 and the information measured in the measurement counter area. If it is the drawing instruction timing, drawing instruction information corresponding to the timing is output to the VDP 183.

  The vibration process and the multi-display process are processes for executing a predetermined effect during the execution of the game times. These vibration processing and multi-display processing will be described below with reference to flowcharts. First, vibration processing for vibrating the symbol display device 29 or the shutter 151 as a kind of effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, the effect of executing the vibration process will be described as appropriate with reference to FIGS. 21A and 21B.

  In step S101, it is determined whether or not the symbol display device 29 is displaying the symbol variation. If the symbol variation is not being displayed, the vibration processing is terminated. If the symbol variation display is in progress, it is determined in step S102 whether or not the display surface vibration reach game time has been reached. This determination is made by referring to the information of the variation display pattern determined at the start of the current game round.

  In the case of the game time of the display surface vibration reach, whether or not the display surface vibration reach is being executed by referring to the information of the variable display pattern and the elapsed time of the game time in step S103. Determine whether or not. If the display surface vibration reach is not being executed, whether or not it is the start timing of the display surface vibration reach by referring to the information of the variable display pattern and the elapsed time of the game time in step S104. Determine whether.

  If it is not the start timing of the display surface vibration reach, the vibration processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing of the display surface vibration reach, the process proceeds to step S105. In step S105, a process for starting the forward / reverse operation of the display drive motor 121 is executed, and then the vibration process ends.

  In the processing of step S105, the display surface vibration state flag is stored in the display surface vibration state flag storage area provided in the work RAM 202, thereby setting the display surface vibration state. By setting to the display surface vibration state, in the drive signal output process for the symbol display device 29 (not shown), for the display drive motor 121, the first operation signal for the symbol display device 29 is used for forward rotation. The state in which the signal is output for a predetermined period and the state in which the reverse rotation signal is output for the predetermined period as the second operation signal of the symbol display device 29 are alternately repeated.

  As described above, the forward rotation signal and the reverse rotation signal are alternately and repeatedly output to the display drive motor 121, whereby the output shaft 121a of the display drive motor 121 performs the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in a predetermined manner. It repeats alternately every period. Therefore, the symbol display device 29 alternately repeats the rotation in the direction toward the initial position and the direction toward the inclined position.

  The amount of movement (rotation amount) of the symbol display device 29 toward the initial position is set smaller than the amount of movement until the symbol display device 29 moves from the initial position to the inclined position, and the amount of movement of the symbol display device 29 toward the inclined position. Is set smaller than the amount of movement from the tilt position to the initial position. More specifically, the display surface vibration reach is executed in a situation where the symbol display unit 61 is in the initial state, and the state in which the display surface 29a faces the shutter unit 152 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained. Within the range where the opening 35 is closed by the display surface 29a and the shutter portion 152 and there is no gap between them when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the movement toward the initial position of the symbol display device 29 And the movement toward the inclined position is performed. That is, each of these movement amounts is small so that the player can recognize that the symbol display device 29 is vibrating as shown in FIG. When the symbol display device 29 vibrates, the player who is paying attention to the display surface 29a recognizes that the symbol display device 29 itself is vibrating instead of the image. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously produce effects with different visual effects in the symbol display device 29 and to intentionally produce a sound having a portion different from the speaker unit 56 as a sound source due to the generation of vibration sound. Can be made.

  Incidentally, the display surface 29a displays an effect by an image corresponding to the vibration of the symbol display device 29 in a situation where the display drive motor 121 is driven and controlled so that the symbol display device 29 vibrates.

  Returning to the description of the vibration processing (FIG. 20), if it is determined in step S103 that the display surface vibration reach is being performed, in step S106, the information on the variable display pattern and the elapsed time of the game time. By referring to the above, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the display surface vibration reach. If it is not the display surface vibration reach end timing, the vibration processing is terminated as it is. If it is the display surface vibration reach end timing, the process proceeds to step S107. In step S107, a process for terminating the forward / reverse operation of the display drive motor 121 is executed, and then the vibration process is terminated.

  By executing the process of step S107, the display surface vibration state flag is erased and the display surface vibration state is canceled, so that the forward rotation signal and the reverse rotation are performed in the drive signal output processing for the symbol display device 29. The state where the signal for output is alternately output is terminated. Note that the end timing is set as the timing at which the game times in which the display surface vibration reach is executed are not limited to this, but are set as timings in the middle of the game times. Also good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S102 that the current game time is not a display surface vibration reach game time, the information on the variable display pattern and the elapsed time of the game time are referred to in step S108. Thus, it is determined whether or not the shutter vibration reach is being executed. If the shutter vibration reach is not being executed, it is determined in step S109 whether or not it is the start timing of the shutter vibration reach by referring to the information on the variable display pattern and the elapsed time of the game times. judge.

  If it is not the start timing of the shutter vibration reach, this vibration processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing of the shutter vibration reach, the process proceeds to step S110. In step S110, a process for starting the forward / reverse operation of the common drive motor 161 is executed, and then the vibration process ends.

  In the process of step S110, the shutter vibration state flag is stored in the shutter vibration state flag storage area provided in the work RAM 202, thereby setting the shutter vibration state. By setting the shutter vibration state, a signal for forward rotation as a first operation signal for the movable object unit 85 is output to the common drive motor 161 in a drive signal output process for the movable object unit 85 (not shown). And the state where the reverse rotation signal is output as the second operation signal of the movable object unit 85 for a predetermined period are alternately repeated.

  As described above, the forward rotation signal and the reverse rotation signal are alternately and repeatedly output to the common drive motor 161, whereby the output shaft 161a of the common drive motor 161 performs the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in a predetermined manner. It repeats alternately every period. Therefore, the sliding movement of the shutter 151 in the direction toward the retracted position and the direction toward the closed position is repeated alternately.

  The amount of movement of the shutter 151 toward the retracted position is set smaller than the amount of movement until the shutter 151 moves from the closed position to the retracted position, and the amount of movement of the shutter 151 toward the closed position moves from the retracted position to the closed position. It is set smaller than the amount of movement until it is done. More specifically, the shutter vibration reach is executed in a situation where the symbol display unit 61 is in the initial state, and the state where the shutter unit 152 faces the display surface 29a in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained. When the opening 35 is closed by the display surface 29a and the shutter unit 152 in the state as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 and there is no gap between the two, the movement and closing position of the shutter 151 toward the retracted position Movement towards is performed. That is, these movement amounts are small so that the player can recognize that the shutter unit 152 is vibrating as shown in FIG. When the shutter 151 vibrates, the player who is paying attention to the display surface 29a recognizes that the shutter unit 152 adjacent to the display surface 29a in a stationary state suddenly vibrates. Accordingly, it is possible to provide an effect having a visual effect different from that of the image displayed on the display surface 29a, and a portion different from the speaker unit 56 is set as a sound source due to generation of vibration sound. Sound can be generated intentionally.

  Incidentally, on the display surface 29a, an effect by an image corresponding to the vibration of the shutter 151 is displayed in a situation where the drive motor 161 for common driving is controlled so that the shutter 151 vibrates.

  Here, in the display surface vibration reach described above, the display drive motor 121 is driven and controlled so that only the symbol display device 29 of the symbol display device 29 and the shutter 151 vibrates, and in the shutter vibration reach, the symbol display is performed. The common drive motor is driven and controlled so that only the shutter 151 of the device 29 and the shutter 151 vibrates. For example, a configuration in which both the symbol display device 29 and the shutter 151 are vibrated simultaneously is conceivable, but in that case, a gap is generated between the display surface 29 a and the shutter 151 in the opening 35 in the initial state of the symbol display unit 61. It is assumed that it will end up being undesirable. On the other hand, when the symbol display device 29 vibrates, the shutter 151 does not vibrate, and when the shutter 151 vibrates, the symbol display device 29 does not vibrate. However, it is possible to produce the effect described above.

  Returning to the description of the vibration processing (FIG. 20), if it is determined in step S108 that the shutter vibration reach is being performed, in step S111, the information of the variable display pattern and the elapsed time of the game time are determined. , It is determined whether it is the end timing of the shutter vibration reach. If it is not the shutter vibration reach end timing, the vibration processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the shutter vibration reach end timing, the process proceeds to step S112. In step S112, a process for ending the forward / reverse operation of the common drive motor 161 is executed, and then the vibration process ends.

  By executing the process of step S112, the shutter vibration state flag is cleared and the shutter vibration state is released, so that the forward rotation signal and the reverse rotation signal are alternately used in the drive signal output process for the shutter 151. The state output to is terminated. The end timing is set as a timing at which the game round in which the shutter vibration reach is executed, but is not limited thereto, and may be set as an intermediate timing of the game round. .

  Next, multi-display processing for switching the symbol display unit 61 to the initial state or the multi-display state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S201, it is determined whether or not the symbol display device 29 is displaying the symbol variation. If the symbol display is not being displayed, the multi-display processing is terminated as it is. If the symbol variation display is being performed, it is determined in step S202 whether or not the multi-display reach is being performed. This determination is made by referring to the information of the variable display pattern determined at the start of the current game round and the elapsed time of the game round.

  If the multi-display reach is not being executed, it is determined in step S203 whether or not it is the start timing of the multi-display reach by referring to the information of the variable display pattern and the elapsed time of the game times. judge. If it is not the start timing of multi-display reach, the multi-display processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing of multi-display reach, the processing of step S204 to step S206 is executed and then the multi-display is performed. The process is terminated.

  In step S204, multi-display state setting processing is executed. Specifically, the multi display state flag is stored in the multi display state flag storage area provided in the work RAM 202 to set the multi display state.

  In a succeeding step S205, a drive start process for tilting the display surface is executed. Specifically, the multi display switching flag is stored in the storage area of the multi display switching flag provided in the work RAM 202, thereby setting the multi display switching state. By setting to the multi-display switching state, in the drive signal output process for the symbol display device 29 (not shown), the display drive motor 121 is used for the positive rotation as the first operation signal of the symbol display device 29. The signal is output until the symbol display device 29 is in the inclined position. At the stage where the symbol display device 29 is placed at the inclined position, the multi-display switching flag is deleted and the multi-display switching state is released.

  In the subsequent step S206, a drive start process for mirror unit arrangement is executed. Specifically, the mirror unit placement flag is stored in the mirror unit placement flag storage area provided in the work RAM 202, thereby setting the switching state for mirror unit placement. When the switching state is set, in the drive signal output process for the movable object unit 85 (not shown), the signal for positive rotation is sent as the first operation signal for the movable object unit 85 to the common drive motor 161. The output is continued until the mirror unit 141 reaches the multi-display position. When the mirror unit 141 moves toward the multi-display position, the shutter 151 moves toward the retracted position. When the mirror unit 141 is disposed at the multi-display position, the shutter 151 moves to the retracted position. It will be in an arranged state. At the stage where the mirror unit 141 is arranged at the multi-display position, the mirror unit arrangement flag is deleted, and the mirror unit arrangement switching state is released.

  The symbol display unit 61 is switched from the initial state to the multi-display state due to the execution of the processes of steps S204 to S206. In this state, an image for multi-display is displayed on the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29. This will be described together with the description of processing by the VDP 183 and the image processing device 206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S202 that the multi-display reach is in progress, the multi-display reach is determined in step S207 by referring to the information of the variable display pattern and the elapsed time of the game times. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing. If it is not the end timing of multi-display reach, the multi-display processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the end timing of multi-display reach, the processing of step S208 to step S210 is performed and then the multi-display is completed. The process is terminated.

  In step S208, a multiple display state canceling process is executed. Specifically, the multi display state is canceled by deleting the multi display state flag from the work RAM 202.

  In a succeeding step S209, a drive start process for returning the display surface is executed. Specifically, the return switching flag is stored in the return switching flag storage area provided in the work RAM 202, thereby setting the return switching state. By setting the return switching state, a reverse rotation signal as a second operation signal of the symbol display device 29 is displayed to the display drive motor 121 in a drive signal output process for the symbol display device 29 (not shown). Is output until the symbol display device 29 reaches the initial position.

  When the symbol display device 29 is returned to the initial position, the return switching flag is deleted and the return switching state is released. Further, the drive signal output process for the symbol display device 29 for executing the output of various signals based on the execution of step S205 and step S209 is executed also when the symbol display device 29 is vibrated, and the symbol display device The normal rotation signal 29 and the reverse rotation signal 29 are signals that are also output when the symbol display device 29 is vibrated.

  In a succeeding step S210, a shutter arrangement driving start process is executed. Specifically, the shutter placement flag is stored in the shutter placement flag storage area provided in the work RAM 202, thereby setting the shutter placement switching state. By setting the switching state, a reverse rotation signal is sent as a second operation signal for the movable object unit 85 to the common drive motor 161 in the drive signal output process for the movable object unit 85 (not shown). The output is continued until the shutter 151 reaches the closed position. When the shutter 151 moves toward the closed position, the mirror unit 141 moves toward the retracted position. When the shutter 151 is disposed at the closed position, the mirror unit 141 is disposed at the retracted position. It becomes.

  At the stage where the shutter 151 is placed at the closed position, the shutter placement flag is deleted, and the shutter placement switching state is released. Further, the drive signal output process for the movable object unit 85 for executing the output of various signals based on the execution of Step S206 and Step S210 is executed also when the shutter 151 is vibrated, and The forward rotation signal and the reverse rotation signal are signals that are also output when the shutter 151 is vibrated.

  The symbol display unit 61 is switched from the multi-display state to the initial state due to the execution of the processes of steps S208 to S210. In this state, an image for multi-display is displayed on the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29. This will be described together with the description of processing by the VDP 183 and the image processing device.

<Processing by VDP 183>
Next, drawing processing executed by the VDP 183 of the display control device 83 will be described.

  Here, prior to the description of the drawing process, an electrical configuration for displaying an image on the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the drawing area 212 of the video RAM 204, FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the device buffer 214 of the image processing device 206, and FIG. FIG. 6C is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the liquid crystal display unit 91 is driven by the image processing device 206.

  As described above, the video RAM 204 is provided with the drawing area 212, and a plurality of unit frame areas 215 are set in the drawing area 212. The plurality of unit frame areas 215 have the same storage capacity, and one unit frame area 215 is shown in FIG.

  Each unit frame area 215 is processed in the video RAM 204 by processing drawing data for one frame on the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 at each drawing timing, and processing the image data read to the cache area 211. This is the area used when creating. Since a plurality of unit frame areas 215 are set, drawing processing is executed using drawing data created in one unit frame area in the future with respect to other unit frame areas. Creation of drawing data to be used is executed. That is, the double buffer method is adopted for the drawing area 212, and each unit frame area 215 functions as a frame buffer.

  Each of these unit frame areas 215 includes a large number of unit areas in a one-to-one correspondence with the pixels on the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 (that is, the unit pixel region 95). Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is displayed in the corresponding unit pixel area 95. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a full color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of RGB in each unit pixel region 95. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of 3 bytes. Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color method, and for example, in a configuration that can display only 256 colors in each unit pixel area 95, the storage capacity of each unit area may be 1 byte.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, each unit frame area 215 is divided into a plurality of areas 215a and 215b, and an upper drawing frame (first drawing frame or odd drawing frame) 215a and a lower drawing. And a frame (second drawing frame or even-numbered drawing frame) 215b. The upper drawing frame 215a corresponds to both the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 in the liquid crystal display unit 91 in the initial display state of the symbol display unit 61, and in the multi-display state of the symbol display unit 61, This corresponds to the upper display area 96 in the liquid crystal display unit 91. Further, the lower drawing frame 251 b corresponds to the lower display area 97 in the liquid crystal display unit 91 in the multi-display state of the symbol display unit 61. FIG. 23C is a schematic diagram in which the liquid crystal display unit 91 is divided into an upper display area 96 and a lower display area 97.

  As described above, the VDP 183 transfers the drawing data stored in the drawing area 212 to the image processing device 206 of the symbol display device 29 through the drawing signal path SC1. Here, the signal path SC1 for the drawing signal will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 18, the drawing signal signal path SC1 electrically connects the drawing signal signal line group 221 provided on the display control board 181 to the display control board 181 and the symbol display device 29. A drawing signal harness 222 as a connector unit provided in this manner and a drawing signal signal line group 223 provided in the symbol display device 29 are provided.

  The number of signal lines of the drawing signal signal line group 221, the number of signal lines of the drawing signal harness 222, and the number of signal lines of the drawing signal signal line group 223 are the unit pixel regions 95 in the vertical direction of the liquid crystal display unit 91 (FIG. 7). It is half of the number of (see (a)). That is, the signal path SC for the drawing signal has a unit signal path corresponding to the number of horizontal line areas constituting the upper display area 96 (that is, the number of horizontal line areas constituting the lower display area 97) on a one-to-one basis. It has.

  When the drawing data stored in the unit frame area 215 is transferred, the drawing data corresponding to each unit pixel area 95 constituting the upper display area 96 in the liquid crystal display unit 91 is transferred in parallel by one column in the vertical direction. At the same time, the drawing data corresponding to each unit pixel area 95 constituting the lower display area 97 is transferred in parallel in the vertical direction by one column in the liquid crystal display unit 91. More specifically, when drawing data is stored in the upper drawing frame 215 a of the unit frame area 215, the drawing data is transferred in parallel in the vertical direction one column at a time, and below the unit frame area 215. When drawing data is stored in the side drawing frame 215b, after the drawing data transfer of the upper drawing frame 215a is completed, the drawing data of the lower drawing frame 215b is transferred in parallel by one column in the vertical direction. The

  Incidentally, in the case of the above configuration, one unit of information when drawing data is transferred can be regarded as data corresponding to one unit pixel region 95, and the upper display region 96 (or the lower display region 97). It can also be regarded as data for one column in the vertical direction in the unit pixel area 95.

  Further, the VDP 183 is electrically connected to the image processing device 206 through a transfer signal signal path (transfer signal transfer path) SC2 provided separately from the drawing signal signal path SC1. As shown in FIG. 18, the transfer signal signal path SC2 electrically connects the transfer signal signal line group 226 provided on the display control board 181 to the display control board 181 and the symbol display device 29. A transfer signal harness 227 as a connector unit provided in this manner, and a transfer signal signal line group 228 provided in the symbol display device 29.

  The first transfer signal or the second transfer signal is transferred from the VDP 183 to the image processing device 206 through the signal path SC2 for transfer signals. When receiving the first transfer signal, the image processing device 206 recognizes that the drawing signal currently transferred is related to the upper display area 96 and receives the second transfer signal. In this case, it is recognized that the drawing signal currently transferred is related to the lower display area 97.

  As described above, the image processing device 206 includes the device buffer 214. The device buffer 214 includes a large number of unit areas in a one-to-one correspondence with the pixels on the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 (that is, the unit pixel region 95). The drawing data transferred from the VDP 183 to the image processing device 206 is written in the device buffer 214.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, the device buffer 214 is divided into a plurality of areas 214a and 214b, and includes an upper device frame (first device frame or odd device frame) 214a and a lower device frame ( First device frame or even device frame) 214b. The drawing data transferred when the first transfer signal is received by the image processing device 206 is written in the upper device frame 214a, and the second transfer is performed in the lower device frame 214b by the image processing device 206. When the signal is received, the transferred drawing data is written.

  The image processing device 206 displays the predetermined image on the display surface 29 a by drawing the drawing data written in the device buffer 214 on the liquid crystal display unit 91. In this case, the drawing data stored in the upper device frame 214 a of the device buffer 214 is drawn in the upper display area 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 and the drawing data stored in the lower device frame 214 b of the device buffer 214. Is drawn in the lower display area 97 of the liquid crystal display unit 91.

  Based on the above configuration, the drawing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the drawing process is repeatedly started periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the VDP 183.

  In the drawing process, first, in step S301, it is determined based on the drawing instruction information input from the display CPU 182 whether or not it is the creation timing or the transfer timing of drawing data. Incidentally, the drawing instruction information is information in which a drawing instruction for one frame on the display surface 29a is set, and the data information of the bitmap image and the color palette table for determining the display color of each dot of the bitmap image. Contains information.

  If it is neither the creation timing nor the transfer timing of the drawing data, the drawing process is terminated as it is, and if it is either the creation timing or the transfer timing, the process proceeds to step S302. In step S302, it is determined whether or not it is in the multi display state. If it is not in the multi display state, it is determined in step S303 whether or not it is in various switching states.

  When the display CPU 182 is set to the multi display state, an internal command to that effect is output to the VDP 183 so that the multi display state is set in the VDP 183 and the multi display state is canceled in the display CPU 182. In such a case, an internal command to that effect is output to the VDP 183 so that the multi-display state is canceled in the VDP 183. In addition, when the display CPU 182 is set to the multi-display switching state or the return switching state, an internal command to that effect is output to the VDP 183 so that various switching states are set in the VDP 183 and the display CPU 182 performs the multi-display switching. When the switching state or the return switching state is released, an internal command to that effect is output to the VDP 183, whereby various switching states are released in the VDP 183.

  If it is not in various switching states, the drawing process for normal display is executed in step S304, and then the drawing process is terminated. If it is in various switching states, drawing for switching is performed in step S305. After executing the process, the drawing process is terminated. If it is determined in step S302 that the display state is the multi-display state, the multi-display drawing process is executed in step S306, and then the drawing process ends.

  Hereinafter, the normal display drawing process in step S304 and the multi-display drawing process in step S306 will be described in detail with reference to flowcharts.

  Incidentally, in the drawing process at the time of switching in step S305, the drawing data creation process in the unit frame area 215 and the device are performed so that the same entire color display such as the entire white display or the entire black display is performed on the display surface 29a. Data transfer processing to the buffer 214 is executed. For example, when the symbol display device 29 is rotated while displaying an image for non-multi display, the image for non-multi display is projected on the first reflecting surface 142a and the second reflecting surface 143a of the movable object unit 85. It will be. When the symbol display device 29 is rotated while displaying a multi-display image, the player temporarily displays a mixed display of the upper display image and the lower display image on the display surface 29a. It will be visually recognized. On the other hand, by setting the same color display, while the symbol display device 29 is being rotated, even if the display surface 29a is viewed, only the same color display is visible. Even if the first reflecting surface 142a and the second reflecting surface 143a to be projected are visually recognized, only the same color display can be visually recognized. Therefore, the display of the display 29 is not discomfort and the rotation of the symbol display device 29 is improved. It can be carried out.

  In addition, as a structure for making the visual recognition of the display not uncomfortable at the time of the switching, it is not limited to a structure in which the same color display is made on the entire surface, a state where it is not reversed upside down and a state where it is turned upside down In any of these cases, a geometric pattern or the like that can be visually recognized without a sense of incongruity may be displayed.

  The normal display drawing process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S401, a transfer process to the video RAM 204 is executed. Specifically, based on the drawing instruction information already received from the display CPU 182, it is determined whether or not it is time to transfer the image data of the character ROM 203 to the video RAM 204. If it is determined that the transfer timing is reached, the image data corresponding to the timing is transferred to the video RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S402, drawing data creation processing for the upper drawing frame 215a is executed. Specifically, based on the drawing instruction information already received from the display CPU 182, it is determined whether or not it is the drawing data creation timing. If it is determined that it is the creation timing, drawing data corresponding to the current timing is created for the upper drawing frame 215a in the unit frame area 215 to be created this time. In creating the drawing data, the image data already transferred to the video RAM 204 is used (or processed). Since the video RAM 204 has a faster data reading speed than the character ROM 203, the drawing data is created using the image data once read into the video RAM 204 as described above, thereby shortening the drawing data creation time. Is achieved.

  Here, in the normal display drawing processing, drawing data is created for the upper drawing frame 215a in the unit frame area 215, but drawing data is created for the lower drawing frame 215b. Absent. Therefore, the lower drawing frame 215b is an empty area. Therefore, in a situation where drawing processing for normal display is executed, the lower drawing frame 215b is used as a transfer destination area for image data from the character ROM 203, like the cache area 211. As a result, the area of the video RAM 204 can be effectively used, and in the normal display drawing process, a larger amount of image data can be read to the video RAM 204 at a time than the multi-display drawing process. Therefore, in the normal display drawing process, it is possible to display various images or images having a large capacity of image data necessary for drawing as compared to the multi-display drawing process.

  In a succeeding step S403, it is determined whether it is the first transfer timing based on the drawing instruction information already received from the display CPU 182. If it is the transfer timing, in step S404, output of the first transfer signal via the transfer signal signal path SC2 is started. In subsequent step S405, the data transfer state is set so that the drawing data currently stored in the upper drawing frame 215a in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred this time is transferred to the image processing device 206.

  When a negative determination is made in step S403 or after execution of step S405, it is determined in step S406 whether or not it is the second transfer timing based on the drawing instruction information already received from the display CPU 182. If it is the transfer timing, in step S407, output of the second transfer signal through the transfer signal signal path SC2 is started. In subsequent step S408, the data transfer is performed so that the drawing data currently stored in the upper drawing frame 215a is transferred to the image processing device 206 instead of the lower drawing frame 215b in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred at this time. Set the state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S406, or after execution of step S408, the normal display drawing process is terminated.

  Next, the multi-display drawing process in step S306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S501, a transfer process to the video RAM 204 is executed. The contents of the transfer process are basically the same as in step S401. However, as described later, in the multi-display drawing process, drawing data is also created in the lower drawing frame 215b in the unit frame area 215. The lower drawing frame 215b is not used for reading image data. That is, in step S501, only the cache area 211 is used for reading image data.

  In subsequent step S502, drawing data creation processing is executed for the upper drawing frame 215a in the inverted state. Specifically, based on the drawing instruction information already received from the display CPU 182, it is determined whether or not it is the creation timing of drawing data for the upper drawing frame 215 a. If it is determined that it is the creation timing, drawing data corresponding to the current timing is created for the upper drawing frame 215a in the unit frame area 215 to be created this time. In this case, when drawing data is created in the state instructed by the drawing instruction information, a predetermined image is displayed in the upper display area 96 when an image corresponding to the drawing data is displayed in the upper display area 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91. Will be projected upside down.

  As already described, the image displayed in the upper display area 96 is visually recognized by the player after being reflected by the first reflecting surface 142a and the second reflecting surface 143a in the multi-view display. In the configuration in which the reflection on the 142a and the second reflection surface 143a is performed above the display surface 29a, the image displayed on the first reflection surface 142a and the second reflection surface 143a is different from the image displayed on the display surface 29a. It will be reversed. On the other hand, by creating drawing data for the upper drawing frame 215a so that an image in the upside down direction is displayed in the upper display area 96, the first reflecting surface 142a and the second reflecting surface are created. The image displayed at 143a is originally an image to be visually recognized by the player.

  In the subsequent step S503, drawing data creation processing for the lower drawing frame 215b is executed. Specifically, based on the drawing instruction information already received from the display CPU 182, it is determined whether or not it is the creation timing of drawing data on the lower drawing frame 215 b. If it is determined that it is the creation timing, drawing data corresponding to the current timing is created for the lower drawing frame 215b in the unit frame area 215 to be created this time. Unlike the case of step S503, the drawing data is created so that the image is not turned upside down.

  In a succeeding step S504, it is determined whether it is the first transfer timing based on the drawing instruction information already received from the display CPU 182. If it is the transfer timing, in step S505, output of the first transfer signal via the transfer signal signal path SC2 is started. In subsequent step S506, the data transfer state is set so that the drawing data currently stored in the upper drawing frame 215a in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred this time is transferred to the image processing device 206.

  If a negative determination is made in step S504 or after execution of step S506, it is determined in step S507 whether it is the second transfer timing based on the drawing instruction information already received from the display CPU 182. If it is the transfer timing, in step S508, output of the second transfer signal through the signal path SC2 for transfer signal is started. In subsequent step S509, the data transfer state is set so that the drawing data currently stored in the lower drawing frame 215b in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred this time is transferred to the image processing device 206.

<Processing by Image Processing Device 206>
Next, device-side processing by the image processing device 206 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. Note that the device-side processing is repeatedly activated periodically (for example, 2 msec) in the image processing device 206.

  In step S601, it is determined whether the first transfer signal is received from the VDP 183. If the first transfer signal is received, the data storage state is set so that the drawing data received from the VDP 183 is stored in the upper device frame 214a in the device buffer 214 in step S602. To do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S601 or after execution of step S602, it is determined in step S603 whether a second transfer signal is received from the VDP 183. If the second transfer signal has been received, in step S604, the data storage state is set so that the drawing data received from the VDP 183 is stored in the lower device frame 214b in the device buffer 214. Set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S603 or after execution of step S604, it is determined in step S605 whether it is a drawing timing. If it is not the drawing timing, the device-side processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the drawing timing, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, it is determined whether or not the current drawing target in the liquid crystal display unit 91 is an odd-numbered horizontal line region in the vertical direction. If the drawing target is odd-numbered, the correspondence of the upper device frame 214a is determined in step S607. On the other hand, if it is an even number, output processing from the corresponding area of the lower device frame 214b is executed in step S608. Then, this device side process is complete | finished.

<Drawing data creation and transfer>
Next, a description will be given of how drawing data is created and transferred by executing the above processes.

  First, with reference to FIG. 28A, how drawing data is created and transferred when normal display is performed will be described.

  When normal display is performed, drawing data (“A1” and “A2”) is created only for the upper drawing frame 215 a in each unit frame area 215 of the video RAM 204. In this case, the lower drawing frame 215b of each unit frame area 215 is an empty area.

  The VDP 183 first outputs the first transfer signal of the drawing data (“A1”) stored in the upper drawing frame 215a in the unit frame area 215 that is the current transfer source target through the transfer signal path SC2. In this state, the image data is transferred through the signal path SC1 for the drawing signal, and after the transfer is completed, the second transfer signal is output through the signal path SC2 for the transfer signal and stored in the upper drawing frame 215a. The rendered drawing data is transferred through the signal path SC1 for the drawing signal. As a result, the same drawing data (“A1”) is stored in each of the upper device frame 214 a and the lower device frame 214 b in the device buffer 214 of the image processing device 206.

  The image processing device 206 outputs the drawing data stored in the upper device frame 214 a to the upper display area 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 and the drawing data stored in the lower device frame 214 b of the liquid crystal display unit 91. Output to the lower display area 97. Here, in the normal display in which the multi-view display is not performed, the symbol display unit 61 is in an initial state, and the player basically visually recognizes the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 from the front. Then, in the configuration in which the parallax barrier panel 94 of the symbol display device 29 is provided as shown in FIG. 7B, the player is displayed in the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 of the liquid crystal display unit 91. Both images will be viewed at the same time. On the other hand, as described above, in the liquid crystal display unit 91, the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 are set to be alternately arranged in the vertical direction in units of one pixel. In this case, the same drawing data is output to the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 as described above. More specifically, the same drawing is performed on the combination of the upper display area 96 of one line and the lower display area 97 of one line continuous to the upper display area 96, and the above-mentioned drawing is performed for each combination. Different drawing is performed according to the same drawing data. Thereby, on the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29, the same drawing data is displayed in a state of being spread over the entire display surface 29a.

  With the above configuration, when normal display is performed, in the unit frame area 215, drawing data is created only for the upper drawing frame 215a. In detail, an image is displayed using all the unit pixel regions 95. Therefore, when normal display is performed, it is difficult for the player who has visually recognized the display surface 29a to feel uncomfortable. In particular, as described above, the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 are set so as to be alternately arranged in units of one pixel in the vertical direction, and the same drawing is performed for one line of the upper display area. 96 and the lower display area 97 that is one line continuous to the upper display area 96, the effect of making it difficult for the player who has visually recognized the display surface 29a to feel uncomfortable.

  Further, the drawing data for the upper display and the drawing data for the lower display in the normal display can be made common. Therefore, the data capacity of the image data to be stored in the character ROM 203 is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the image data corresponding to the drawing data for the upper display and the drawing data for the lower display are individually stored. It becomes possible to do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28B, a description will be given of how drawing data is created and transferred when multi-view display is performed.

  When multi-view display is performed, drawing data is created for each of the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b in each unit frame area 215 of the video RAM 204 ("B1" and "C1"). ”,“ B2 ”and“ C2 ”). In this case, drawing data is created in the upper drawing frame 215a in a vertically inverted state with reference to the case of normal display, and drawing data is created in the lower drawing frame 215b in a state in which it has not been turned upside down. The

  The VDP 183 is outputting the first transfer signal of the drawing data (“B1”) stored in the upper drawing frame 215a in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred at this time through the transfer signal path SC2. Then, after the drawing signal is transferred through the signal path SC1 and the transfer is completed, the second transfer signal is output through the signal path SC2 for the transfer signal in the same unit frame area 215. The drawing data (“C1”) stored in the lower drawing frame 215b is transferred through the signal path SC1 for drawing signals. As a result, the upper display frame drawing data is stored in the upper device frame 214a of the device buffer 214 of the image processing device 206 in an upside down manner, and the lower display frame is drawn in the lower device frame 214b. Data is stored in a state that is not inverted upside down.

  The image processing device 206 outputs the drawing data stored in the upper device frame 214 a to the upper display area 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 and the drawing data stored in the lower device frame 214 b of the liquid crystal display unit 91. Output to the lower display area 97. The image displayed on the upper display area 96 is visually recognized by the player after being reflected by the first reflecting surface 142a and the second reflecting surface 143a, and the image displayed on the lower display area 97 is played on the display surface 29a. Directly visible to the person. Thereby, expansion of the display area visually recognized by the player through the opening 35 can be realized by using the single symbol display device 29.

  Here, in the situation where normal display is performed as described above, drawing data is created only in the upper drawing frame 215a in the unit frame area 215, and in the situation where multi-view display is performed, upper drawing is performed in the unit frame area 215. In the configuration in which drawing data is created in both the frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b, the upper device frame is displayed in the device buffer 214 regardless of whether normal display is performed or multi-view display is performed. Drawing data is transferred to both 214a and the lower device frame 214b. The drawing data transferred to the upper device frame 214 a corresponds to all the unit pixel areas 95 of the upper display area 96, and the drawing data transferred to the lower device frame 214 b is stored in the lower display area 97. This corresponds to all the unit pixel regions 95. As a result, the image processing device 206 only needs to execute the same drawing process regardless of whether the normal display is performed or the multi-view display is performed. Therefore, the configuration of the image processing device 206 is complicated. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the VDP 183 is directed to the lower device frame 214b after the drawing data transfer to the upper device frame 214a is completed in any of the normal display state and the multi-view display state. Transfer drawing data. Thus, a common transfer path can be used in both situations, and the hardware configuration can be simplified.

  The VDP 183 transmits a first transfer signal when transferring drawing data toward the upper device frame 214a, and transmits a second transfer signal when transferring drawing data toward the lower device frame 214b. is there. The image processing device 206 stores the drawing data transferred in a state where the first transfer signal is received in the upper device frame 214a, and the drawing data transferred in a state where the second transfer signal is received. Data is stored in the lower device frame 214b. As a result, the image processing device 206 only needs to execute the same drawing data storage process regardless of whether the normal display is performed or the multi-view display is performed. Complexity can be suppressed.

  In particular, in a situation where multi-view display is performed, the image displayed in the lower display area 97 is in an upside down state, but the drawing data in the upside down state is created in the VDP 183 and the image is displayed. The processing device 206 is configured to simply draw the drawing data on the liquid crystal display unit 91. Therefore, also from this point, the complexity of the configuration of the image processing device 206 can be suppressed.

<Display contents in the display area of the symbol display unit 61>
Next, the display contents in the display area of the symbol display unit 61 including the display surface 29a and the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a will be described taking an example of effects for game times. FIG. 29A is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents in a situation where multi-display reach is not performed, and FIG. 29B is a diagram for explaining display contents in a situation where multi-display reach is being performed. It is explanatory drawing of.

  In a situation where the multi-display reach is not performed, as shown in FIG. 29A, the symbol display unit 61 is in an initial state, and the display surface 29a is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 23. . In this case, multi-view display is not performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), in a state where a plurality of display areas are set on the display surface 29a, a plurality of symbols are predetermined in each display area. Displayed in order. A predetermined background image is displayed on the entire display surface 29a.

  In the situation where the multi-display reach is performed, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the symbol display unit 61 is in the multi-display state, and the display surface 29a has a lower edge side as a rotation axis with respect to the game board 23. The reflective surfaces 142a and 143a in a state orthogonal to the display surface 29a are visible through the opening 35. In this case, multi-view display is performed, and when viewed from the player, the image reflected by each of the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a is displayed at a position where the display surface 29a extends upward on the same plane. Is visually recognized.

  In the multi-display reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), a plurality of characters CH1 and CH2 are displayed on a predetermined background image as an image directly visible from the display surface 29a. The plurality of characters CH1 and CH2 are displayed so that the player can recognize that they are disposed on the side relatively near and the far side of the display surface 29a in the depth direction. Further, the near character CH1 is displayed as a shooting character, and the far character CH2 is displayed as a shot character.

  In the first reflecting surface 142a having a relatively large area among the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a, the distant character CH2 is displayed so as to be larger than the size directly visible from the display surface 29a. That is, an area for displaying an image reflected by the first reflecting surface 142a in the upper display area 96 of the display surface 29a is displayed as if the first reflecting surface 142a has a role as a gun sight. Be controlled. On the other hand, on the second reflecting surface 143a having a relatively small area among the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a, the result of shooting the far-side character CH2 by the near-side character CH1 is displayed. In other words, as if the second reflecting surface 143a has a role for reporting the shooting result, an area for displaying an image reflected by the second reflecting surface 143a in the upper display area 96 of the display surface 29a is displayed. Is done. In the multi-display reach, when the game result of the game round is a jackpot result, an image is displayed as if the distant character CH2 is destroyed as a result of shooting by the close character CH1, If it is not a jackpot result, the image is displayed as if the destruction failed.

  Here, the total area of both the first reflection surface 142a and the second reflection surface 143a is set to be narrower than the area of the display surface 29a, and the display surface 29a includes the first reflection surface 142a and the second reflection surface. There is a region that is not reflected by 143a. The upper display area 96 included in the non-reflected area is set as a blank area, and the same color display such as black display or white display is performed in the blank area.

  That is, in a situation where multi-view display is performed, the VDP 183 is reflected by the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a when creating drawing data corresponding to the upper display area 96 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 182. For the area, drawing data corresponding to the image to be reflected is created, and for the blank area, drawing data for displaying the same color is created. In this case, when the same color display corresponds to the ground color, data for displaying the ground color may be set as data corresponding to the blank area in the drawing data. In the configuration in which data for displaying the ground color is set as an initial value in an area corresponding to each unit pixel area 95 in the drawing area 212, the drawing data is set so as to maintain the initial value. It is good also as a structure to be. In addition, when data for maintaining the initial state of the display surface 29a is included in a part of the drawing data, the image processing device 206 that has received the data applies to the unit pixel area 95 corresponding to the data. Output for initial state. Incidentally, when the black display is performed, the overall brightness of the display surface 29a can be suppressed, and when the white display is performed, the overall brightness of the display surface 29a can be increased.

  In addition, the range set as the area where the image reflected on the first reflecting surface 142a is displayed on the display surface 29a may be set wider than the first reflecting surface 142a. The range set as the area where the image reflected by the second reflecting surface 143a is displayed may be set wider than the second reflecting surface 143a. In this case, even if the height of the player's viewpoint fluctuates in a predetermined range in the vertical direction, it is difficult to project the image displayed in the blank area on the first reflecting surface 142a and the second reflecting surface 143a.

  The front door frame 16 is provided with an operation unit that can be manually operated by the player. In the multi-display reach, the player operates the operation unit to aim the shooting at the near character CH1 or It is good also as a structure which can be operated.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A symbol display device 29 capable of performing dual view display, and a mirror unit 141 having reflection surfaces 142a and 143a capable of reflecting an image displayed on the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29. The provided symbol display unit 61 is provided. When the symbol display unit 61 is in a multi-display state, the symbol display device 29 is arranged so that the display surface 29a is inclined upward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The mirror unit 141 is arranged so that the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a are inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 above the display surface 29a, so that an image displayed toward the lower side of the display surface 29a is displayed. An image that is directly visible from a predetermined position in front of the pachinko machine 10 and is displayed toward the upper side of the display surface 29a. Becomes visible from the pachinko machine 10 in front of a predetermined position by being projected on the reflecting surface 142a, 143a. That is, in the multi-display state, the display surface 29a and the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a are configured as regions for displaying images, and different images can be displayed on the display surface 29a and the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a. It becomes possible. Thereby, the area for displaying an image can be increased as compared with a configuration in which an image is displayed only on the display surface 29a.

  In particular, in the multi-display state, as described above, the symbol display device 29 is disposed so that the display surface 29a is inclined upward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a are disposed above the display surface 29a. Since the mirror unit 141 is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to secure a large display area as compared with the opening 35 of the game board 23. As a result, the opening A relatively large display area can be secured without increasing the size of 35. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the size in the front-rear direction of the symbol display unit 61 in a state in which a large display area is secured as compared with the opening 35.

  For example, a configuration in which the opening 35 is enlarged to secure a relatively large display area is envisaged, but in this case, it is necessary to reduce an area in which the game ball can flow down in the game area. If it does so, the flow-down mode of the game ball in the game area becomes monotonous, which is not preferable. In addition, although a configuration in which the size of the game board 23 is extended in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction is also assumed, a plurality of electric devices are installed around the game board 23, and the size of the game board 23 is changed in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. Expansion in the direction is not preferable because the installation area of the electric devices is reduced. In addition, the size of the pachinko machine 10 is expanded in the vertical direction or the left-right direction, and a large game board is installed in accordance therewith, and a configuration in which a symbol display device having a large display surface is arranged is also assumed. Since 10 is installed in an existing island facility in a game hall or the like, it is not preferable to expand the size of the pachinko machine 10 in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

  Furthermore, although the structure which aims at the enlargement of a display area is also assumed by arrange | positioning the symbol display apparatus which has a larger display surface compared with the opening part 35 inclining to the back of the pachinko machine 10, in this case, the pachinko machine 10 There is a concern that the dimension in the front-rear direction becomes extremely large. In the game hall, the pachinko machine 10 is arranged with the back surface facing the island facility. Therefore, if the longitudinal dimension of the pachinko machine 10 becomes extremely large, the pachinko machine 10 faces the island facility. There is a concern that the placement cannot be performed well.

  On the other hand, as described above, the symbol display device 29 is arranged so that the display surface 29a is inclined upward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a are located above the display surface 29a. 10 By arranging the mirror unit 141 so as to be inclined downward toward the rear, it is possible to satisfactorily realize an increase in the display area without causing the above disadvantages.

  In addition, since the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a and the display surface 29a are arranged side by side rather than side by side, the influence of the parallax of the left and right eyes on the multi-view display is reduced for the player. The That is, the left eye and the right eye have different gaze angles in the horizontal direction when viewing a predetermined part of the display surface 29a. Assuming a configuration in which multi-view display is performed in the left-right direction on the display surface 29a, depending on the position of the player's viewpoint with respect to the display surface 29a, the viewing angle is directed to the left side due to the difference in the viewing angle between the left eye and the right eye It is assumed that the set image is visually recognized with the left eye and the image with the viewing angle set to the right side is visually recognized with the right eye. On the other hand, in the left eye and the right eye, the angle difference between the lines of sight in the vertical direction when viewing a predetermined part of the display surface 29a is generally small. Therefore, by performing multi-view display in the vertical direction on the display surface 29a like the present pachinko machine 10, the occurrence of inconvenience such as viewing different displays of the multi-view display in the left eye and the right eye is suppressed, For the player, the influence of the parallax between the left and right eyes on the multi-view display is reduced.

  In the multi-display state, the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a are disposed above the display surface 29a. In a game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed, in-store lighting is provided on the ceiling. In this case, as described above, the reflective surfaces 142a and 143a are arranged above the display surface 29a, so that the light from the in-store lighting is hardly reflected on the reflective surfaces 142a and 143a that easily reflect light.

  A display drive motor 121 is provided, and the symbol display device 29 is rotated between an inclined position where multi-view display is performed and an initial position where multi-view display is not performed. As described above, the symbol display device 29 itself is displaced so as to change the direction of the display surface 29a, so that an effect with a large impact can be performed. Further, when the multi-view display is not performed, the display surface 29a is parallel or substantially parallel to the transparent panel 168, so that the visibility of the display surface 29a in the situation can be improved.

  In the configuration in which the symbol display device 29 is displaceable as described above, the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 are not integrated with the display control device 83 but are fixed to the rear base 82 of the symbol display unit 61. Has been. In order to dissipate heat from the display control device 83, a configuration in which the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 are integrated with the display control device 83 is also assumed. In this case, the total weight of the integrated body of the symbol display device 29 and the display control device 83 is The weight of the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 will increase. If it does so, the weight load concerning the rotating shaft of the symbol display apparatus 29 and the output shaft 121a of the display drive motor 121 will increase. On the other hand, since the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 are fixed to the rear base 82 that does not move integrally with the symbol display device 29, the rotation shaft of the symbol display device 29 and the output shaft of the display drive motor 121. While suppressing the weight load applied to 121a, the heat radiation of the display control device 83 can be performed satisfactorily.

  In the initial state of the symbol display unit 61 in which multi-view display is not performed, drawing data is created for the upper drawing frame 215a in the unit frame area 215, but drawing data for the lower drawing frame 215b. Is not created. Therefore, the lower drawing frame 215b is an empty area. In the initial state, the lower drawing frame 215 b is used as a transfer destination area for image data from the character ROM 203, similarly to the cache area 211. As a result, the area of the video RAM 204 can be effectively used, and in the initial state, a larger amount of image data can be read to the video RAM 204 at a time than in the multi-display state. Therefore, in the initial state, it is possible to display various images or images with a large capacity of image data necessary for drawing as compared to the multi-display state.

  Further, as described above, the lower drawing frame 215b may not be used as the transfer destination of the image data. Even in this case, the area of the drawing data created is in a multi-display state. Since it is narrower than that, there is a margin in processing time when creating drawing data. Therefore, it is possible to display many sprites or display many effects by using this.

  In both cases where multi-view display is performed and multi-view display is not performed, drawing data is transferred to both the upper device frame 214a and the lower device frame 214b of the device buffer 214. The drawing data transferred to the upper device frame 214 a corresponds to all the unit pixel areas 95 of the upper display area 96, and the drawing data transferred to the lower device frame 214 b is stored in the lower display area 97. This corresponds to all the unit pixel regions 95. As a result, the image processing device 206 only needs to execute the same drawing process regardless of whether the normal display is performed or the multi-view display is performed. Therefore, the configuration of the image processing device 206 is complicated. Can be suppressed.

  The mirror unit 141 is provided as a movable object unit 85 together with the shutter 151. The display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29 arranged at the initial position for non-multi-view display is made visible while the display surface 29a and the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a are visible through the opening 35 during multi-view display. In order to confront the entire opening 35, the display surface 29a needs to be enlarged. Then, the initial cost of the symbol display device 29 increases, and the amount of projection of the symbol display device 29 to the rear of the game board 23 increases at the inclined position. On the other hand, the vertical dimension of the opening 35 is set larger than the vertical dimension of the display surface 29a. However, in this configuration, although the above problem is solved, the upper edge of the opening 35 and the upper edge of the symbol display device 29 are separated in the vertical direction when the symbol display device 29 is arranged at the initial position. The On the other hand, in a state where the symbol display device 29 is disposed at the initial position, the shutter 151 is disposed at the closed position, and the entire gap between the upper edge of the opening 35 and the upper edge of the symbol display device 29 is removed. Block. Thereby, in the state where the symbol display device 29 is arranged at the initial position, the inside of the accommodation space 102 of the rear base 82 and the like from the gap between the upper edge of the opening 35 and the upper edge of the symbol display device 29 is pachinko. It can be prevented from being visible from the front of the machine 10.

  In this configuration, the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 are operated by the driving force of a single common driving motor 161. Thereby, the number of drive motors can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which drive motors are individually provided for each of the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151.

  Further, in the configuration in which both the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 slide in the vertical direction by the driving force of the single common drive motor 161 as described above, the mirror unit 141 and the mirror unit 141 are interposed by the common gears 162 to 164. The direction of sliding movement with the shutter 151 is the reverse direction. Therefore, the weight load of the mirror unit 141 acts in a direction to cancel the weight load of the shutter 151, and the weight load of the shutter 151 acts in a direction to cancel the weight load of the mirror unit 141. As a result, the driving force required for the common drive motor 161 can be reduced while utilizing the weight load of the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151.

  When the processing for vibration (FIG. 20) is executed by the display CPU 182, an effect of vibrating the symbol display device 29 itself is performed, and an effect of vibrating the shutter 151 is performed. Thereby, the attention degree to a game can be raised. In this case, both the symbol display device 29 and the shutter 151 do not vibrate simultaneously, and the other does not vibrate when one of them vibrates. For example, a configuration in which both the symbol display device 29 and the shutter 151 are vibrated simultaneously is conceivable, but in that case, a gap is generated between the display surface 29 a and the shutter 151 in the opening 35 in the initial state of the symbol display unit 61. It is assumed that it will end up being undesirable. On the other hand, by making both the symbol display device 29 and the shutter 151 not vibrate at the same time, it is possible to achieve an effect by executing the vibration effect while making the appearance preferable.

  Note that, when multi-view display is performed or when multi-view display is not performed, image output is not performed in one or two unit pixel regions 95 existing in the corner portion of the display surface 29a. It is good also as a structure.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the amount of drawing data stored in the drawing area 212 of the video RAM 204 is smaller than that in the case of multi-view display in the situation where normal display is performed in the first embodiment. This is a focused embodiment, and the specific configuration is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a normal display drawing process according to this embodiment.

  In step S701, transfer processing to the video RAM 204 is executed, and in step S702, drawing data creation processing for the upper drawing frame 215a is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S703. Note that the details of the processing in steps S701 to S702 are the same as those in steps S401 to S402 in the first embodiment.

  In step S703, it is determined based on the drawing instruction information already received from the display CPU 182 whether or not it is the transfer timing to the image processing device 206. If it is not the transfer timing, the normal display drawing process is terminated. If it is the transfer timing, non-multi-signal output processing is executed in step S704. In the first embodiment, the VDP 183 and the image processing device 206 are electrically connected through the transfer signal path SC2, and the first transfer signal or the second transfer signal is transmitted through the signal path SC2. However, in the present embodiment, instead of this, the VDP 183 and the image processing device 206 are electrically connected through the non-multi and multi signal paths SC3, and the non-multi signals or Multi-signal transfer is performed (see FIG. 33). The non-multi signal is a signal for causing the image processing device 206 to recognize that drawing data for normal display is transmitted. The multi signal is a state in which drawing data for multi-view display is transmitted. This is a signal for causing the image processing device 206 to recognize the presence.

  In step S704, the non-multi signal is transmitted as a pulse signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-multi signal transmission may be continued until the transfer of the current drawing data is completed. .

  In the subsequent step S705, a transfer start process from the upper drawing frame 215a in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred at this time is executed, and then the normal display drawing process is ended. Accordingly, the data transfer state is set so that the drawing data currently stored in the upper drawing frame 215a is transferred to the image processing device 206.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the number of signal lines of the various signal line groups constituting the signal path SC1 for the drawing signal is half the number of the unit pixel regions 95 in the vertical direction in the liquid crystal display unit 91. However, in the present embodiment, the number of signal lines is equal to or greater than the number of vertical unit pixel areas 95 in the liquid crystal display unit 91, specifically, the vertical unit pixel areas 95 in the liquid crystal display unit 91. It is set as the same number. In this configuration, when drawing data is transferred only from the upper drawing frame 215a out of the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b, it corresponds to the upper drawing frame 215a as a part of the signal lines of various signal line groups. Only the signal lines that have been used are used, and drawing signals are not transmitted on the other signal lines.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a drawing process for multi-display in the present embodiment.

  In step S801, transfer processing to the video RAM 204 is executed. In step S802, drawing data creation processing for the upper drawing frame 215a in an inverted state is executed. In step S803, drawing data for the lower drawing frame 215b. Execute the creation process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804. Note that the details of the processing in steps S801 to S803 are the same as those in steps S501 to S503 in the first embodiment.

  In step S804, based on the drawing instruction information already received from the display CPU 182, it is determined whether it is the transfer timing to the image processing device 206. If it is not the transfer timing, the multi-display drawing process is terminated. If it is the transfer timing, multi-signal output processing is executed in step S805. Although the multi-signal is transmitted as a pulse signal, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-signal transmission may be continued until the current drawing data transfer is completed.

  In subsequent step S806, the transfer start processing from the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred at this time is executed, and then the drawing processing for multi-display is ended. Thus, the data transfer state is set so that the drawing data currently stored in the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred this time is transferred to the image processing device 206. Is done.

  Here, as already described, the number of signal lines of the various signal line groups constituting the signal path SC1 for the drawing signal in the present embodiment is the same as the number of the unit pixel regions 95 in the vertical direction in the liquid crystal display unit 91. Is set. Therefore, when transferring drawing data from the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b, the drawing data and the lower display area 97 corresponding to each unit pixel area 95 constituting the upper display area 96 in the liquid crystal display unit 91 are stored. Both drawing data corresponding to each unit pixel area 95 constituting the image data are simultaneously transferred in parallel in the vertical direction by one column.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing device-side processing in the present embodiment.

  In step S901, it is determined whether or not a multi signal is received. If a multi signal is received, the multi state is set in step S902, and then the process proceeds to step S903, where the multi signal is not received. The process proceeds to step S903 without executing step S902. The multi-state refers to a state in which the image processing device 206 executes the drawing process for multi-view display among the drawing process for normal display and the drawing process for multi-view display.

  In the present embodiment, as already described, the number of signal lines of the various signal line groups constituting the drawing signal path SC1 is set to be the same as the number of vertical unit pixel areas 95 in the liquid crystal display unit 91. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the way of storing the drawing data in the device buffer 214 between the normal display and the multi-view display. Therefore, the drawing data is stored in the device buffer 214 in the same manner regardless of whether the state is the multi-state.

  In step S903, it is determined whether a non-multi signal is received. If a non-multi signal is received, the multi state is canceled in step S904, and then the process proceeds to step S905. If a non-multi signal is not received, the process proceeds to step S905 without executing step S904.

  In step S905, it is determined whether or not it is the drawing timing. If it is not the drawing timing, the device-side processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the drawing timing, the process proceeds to step S906. In step S906, it is determined whether or not the device is in the multi state. If the device is not in the multi state, the non-multi output process is executed in step S907, and then the device side processing is terminated. In step S908, the device side process is terminated after the multi-purpose output process is executed.

  In the non-multi output processing, the drawing data in the horizontal line area for one column among the drawing data stored in the upper device frame 214 a of the device buffer 214 is continuously plural in the vertical direction in the liquid crystal display unit 91. Are output in the same manner for each of the horizontal line regions, specifically, two horizontal line regions that are continuous in the vertical direction. As a result, the same drawing is performed in the horizontal line region for one column of the pair of upper display regions 96 that are continuous in the vertical direction and the horizontal line region for one column of the lower display region 97. On the other hand, in the output process for multi, processing similar to that in steps S606 to S608 in the first embodiment is executed.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how drawing data is created and transferred in the present embodiment.

  First, with reference to FIG. 33A, how drawing data is created and transferred when normal display is performed will be described.

  When normal display is performed, drawing data (“A1” and “A2”) is created only for the upper drawing frame 215 a in each unit frame area 215 of the video RAM 204. In this case, the lower drawing frame 215b of each unit frame area 215 is an empty area.

  The VDP 183 outputs the non-multi signal of the drawing data (“A1”) stored in the upper drawing frame 215a in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred at this time through the non-multi and multi signal paths SC3. In this state, the drawing signal is transferred through the signal path SC1. As a result, the drawing data (“A1”) is stored in the upper device frame 214 a in the device buffer 214 of the image processing device 206. In this case, the lower device frame 214b of the device buffer 214 is an empty area.

  The image processing device 206 executes the non-multi output process already described. As a result, the drawing data stored in the upper device frame 214a is displayed in a state of being spread over the entire display surface 29a. With the above configuration, the drawing data for the upper display and the drawing data for the lower display in the normal display can be made common. Therefore, the data capacity of the image data to be stored in the character ROM 203 is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the image data corresponding to the drawing data for the upper display and the drawing data for the lower display are individually stored. It becomes possible to do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33 (b), a description will be given of how drawing data is created and transferred when multi-view display is performed.

  When multi-view display is performed, drawing data is created for each of the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b in each unit frame area 215 of the video RAM 204 ("B1" and "C1"). ”,“ B2 ”and“ C2 ”). In this case, drawing data is created in the upper drawing frame 215a in a vertically inverted state with reference to the case of normal display, and drawing data is created in the lower drawing frame 215b in a state in which it has not been turned upside down. The

  The VDP 183 simultaneously renders the drawing data (“B1” and “C1”) stored in the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred at this time, as non-multi and multi signals. In a state where the multi-signal is output through the path SC3, the multi-signal is transferred to the image processing device 206 through the signal path SC1 for the drawing signal. As a result, the upper display frame drawing data is stored in the upper device frame 214a of the device buffer 214 of the image processing device 206 in an upside down manner, and the lower display frame is drawn in the lower device frame 214b. Data is stored in a state that is not inverted upside down.

  The image processing device 206 executes the output process for multi described above. Accordingly, the drawing data stored in the upper device frame 214a is output to the upper display area 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91, and the drawing data stored in the lower device frame 214b is output to the lower display area of the liquid crystal display unit 91. 97 is output.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the same processing may be executed in the image processing device 206 regardless of whether normal display or multi-view display is performed in the first embodiment, and the configuration of the image processing device 206 is simplified. In this embodiment, attention is paid to the realization, and the specific configuration is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a drawing process in the present embodiment.

  In step S1001, transfer processing to the video RAM 204 is executed, and in step S1002, drawing data creation processing for the upper drawing frame 215a is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, the drawing process for normal display and the drawing process for multi-view display are not individually set in the VDP 183, but are common to both normal display and multi-view display. Drawing processing is executed. In this case, when the display CPU 182 is in a state in which normal display is to be performed, the display CPU 182 displays each unit area of the upper drawing frame 215a so that drawing data is generated without being inverted upside down in the upper drawing frame 215a. When the information on the data to be created is instructed by the drawing instruction information, and when the multi-view display is to be executed, the upper drawing frame 215a is vertically inverted so that the drawing data is created. Information on data to be created in each unit area of the drawing frame 215a is indicated by the drawing instruction information. As a result, drawing data corresponding to each display state is created in the upper drawing frame 215a in a configuration in which common drawing processing is executed in both normal display and multi-view display.

  In the subsequent step S1003, drawing data creation processing for the lower drawing frame 215b is executed. In this case, the display CPU 182 displays the drawing instruction information so that the drawing data different from the drawing data created in the upper drawing frame 215a is created in the lower drawing frame 215b in the state where the multi-view display is to be executed. In the state where normal display is to be performed, the drawing instruction information is output so that drawing data similar to the drawing data created in the upper drawing frame 215a is created in the lower drawing frame 215b.

  The processing in step S1003 when similar drawing data is created will be specifically described. First, based on the drawing instruction information already received from the display CPU 182, it is determined whether or not it is the creation timing of drawing data in the lower drawing frame 215 b. If it is determined that it is the creation timing, drawing data corresponding to the current timing is created for the lower drawing frame 215b in the unit frame area 215 to be created this time. In creating the drawing data, image data already transferred to the video RAM 204 is used. Further, the drawing data created in the lower drawing frame 215b is similar to the drawing data already created in the upper drawing frame 215a in the same unit frame area 215, and specifically, the lower drawing frame 215b. In each horizontal line area of the frame 215b, drawing data is created so as to connect the drawing data created in a pair of horizontal line areas continuous in the vertical direction of the upper drawing frame 215a.

  In a succeeding step S1004, it is determined whether it is a transfer timing to the image processing device 206 based on the drawing instruction information already received from the display CPU 182. If it is not the transfer timing, the drawing process is terminated as it is. If it is the transfer timing, in step S1005, transfer start processing from the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred at this time is executed, and then this drawing processing is performed. Exit. Thereby, the data transfer state is set so that the drawing data currently stored in the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b is transferred to the image processing device 206.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the number of signal lines of the various signal line groups constituting the signal path SC1 for drawing signals is the unit pixel area 95 in the vertical direction in the liquid crystal display unit 91. More specifically, the same number as the number of unit pixel regions 95 in the vertical direction in the liquid crystal display unit 91 is set. That is, the signal path SC1 for the drawing signal includes unit signal paths corresponding to the number of horizontal line regions in the liquid crystal display unit 91 on a one-to-one basis. In addition, as described above, drawing data is created for both the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b, regardless of whether the normal display or the multi-view display is executed. Is done. In the above configuration, when the drawing data is transferred to the image processing device 206, the upper display area 96 is set in the liquid crystal display unit 91 regardless of whether the normal display or the multi-view display is executed. Both the drawing data corresponding to each unit pixel area 95 constituting and the drawing data corresponding to each unit pixel area 95 constituting the lower display area 97 are simultaneously transferred in parallel by one column in the vertical direction.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing device-side processing in this embodiment.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether it is a drawing timing. If it is not the drawing timing, the device-side processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the drawing timing, the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the current drawing target in the liquid crystal display unit 91 is an odd-numbered horizontal line region in the vertical direction. If the drawing target is odd-numbered, in step S1103, the correspondence with the upper device frame 214a is determined. On the other hand, if it is an even number, output processing from the corresponding area of the lower device frame 214b is executed in step S1104. Then, this device side process is complete | finished.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how drawing data is created and transferred in the present embodiment.

  First, with reference to FIG. 36A, how drawing data is created and transferred when normal display is performed will be described.

  When normal display is performed, drawing data (“A1” and “A2”) is created in the upper drawing frame 215a of each unit frame area 215 of the video RAM 204, and similar to the lower drawing frame 215b. Drawing data (“A1 ′” and “A2 ′”) is created. The VDP 183 simultaneously draws drawing data (“A1” and “A1 ′”) stored in the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred at this time, and a signal path for the drawing signal. The image is transferred to the image processing device 206 through SC1. Accordingly, drawing data for upper display is stored in the upper device frame 214a in the device buffer 214 of the image processing device 206, and drawing data for lower display is stored in the lower device frame 214b.

  The image processing device 206 outputs the drawing data stored in the upper device frame 214 a to the upper display area 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 and the drawing data stored in the lower device frame 214 b of the liquid crystal display unit 91. Output to the lower display area 97. As a result, the horizontal line area data for one column in the drawing data stored in the lower device frame 214b is between the data in the horizontal line area continuous in the vertical direction in the drawing data stored in the upper device frame 214a. An image in the state of interposing is displayed on the display surface 29a. In this case, the same data is not output in the two unit pixel regions 95 that are continuous in the vertical direction in the liquid crystal display unit 91 as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Since data corresponding to each of the pixel areas 95 is output, an image in normal display becomes finer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36 (b), a description will be given of how drawing data is created and transferred when multi-view display is performed.

  When multi-view display is performed, drawing data is created for each of the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b in each unit frame area 215 of the video RAM 204 ("B1" and "C1"). ”,“ B2 ”and“ C2 ”). In this case, drawing data is created in the upper drawing frame 215a in a vertically inverted state with reference to the case of normal display, and drawing data is created in the lower drawing frame 215b in a state in which it has not been turned upside down. The

  The VDP 183 simultaneously draws the drawing data (“B1” and “C1”) stored in the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b in the unit frame area 215 that is the current transfer source target signal path SC1 for the drawing signal. To the image processing device 206. As a result, the upper display frame drawing data is stored in the upper device frame 214a of the device buffer 214 of the image processing device 206 in an upside down manner, and the lower display frame is drawn in the lower device frame 214b. Data is stored in a state that is not inverted upside down.

  The image processing device 206 outputs the drawing data stored in the upper device frame 214 a to the upper display area 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 and the drawing data stored in the lower device frame 214 b of the liquid crystal display unit 91. Output to the lower display area 97. As a result, an image to be reflected by the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a is displayed in the upper display area 96, and an image to be directly viewed from the display surface 29a is displayed in the lower display area 97.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the VDP 183 uses the same subroutine (same program) set as the drawing process to draw data regardless of whether the normal display or the multi-view display is executed. Create. Further, the drawing data transferred from the VDP 183 to the image processing device 206 is the drawing data corresponding to the upper display area 96 and the lower drawing data regardless of whether the normal display or the multi-view display is executed. Both the drawing data corresponding to the side display area 97 are included, and the transfer method to the image processing device 206 is the same. Therefore, since it is not necessary to have a control program corresponding to each of the case where the normal display is executed and the case where the multi-view display is executed in the VDP 183, the storage capacity necessary for storing the control program is reduced. Reduction is planned.

  The image processing device 206 may store drawing data in the device buffer 214 in the same manner regardless of whether the normal display is performed or the multi-view display is performed. In this manner, the drawing process for the liquid crystal display unit 91 may be executed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to have a control program corresponding to each of the case where the normal display is executed and the case where the multi-view display is executed in the image processing device 206, it is necessary to store the control program. The storage capacity can be reduced. A configuration in which the image processing device 206 executes predetermined processing by a hardware circuit instead of executing predetermined processing by a control program is also conceivable. However, in this configuration, drawing data is stored in the same manner. In addition, by simplifying the drawing process in the same manner, the configuration of the hardware circuit can be simplified.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to recognize which of the normal display and the multi-view display is executed in the image processing device 206 as described above, the non-multi and multi use as in the second embodiment is performed. The signal path SC3 is not provided. Further, since the drawing data corresponding to the upper display area 96 and the drawing data corresponding to the lower display area 97 are simultaneously transferred, the signal path SC2 for the transfer signal as in the first embodiment is not provided. ing. Accordingly, the configuration of the signal path between the VDP 183 and the image processing device 206 can be simplified.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the drawing process in the VDP 183 is different from that in the third embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. In the following description, differences from the third embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a drawing process in the present embodiment.

  In step S1201, transfer processing of the video RAM 204 is executed, in step S1202, drawing data creation processing for the upper drawing frame 215a is executed, and in step S1203, drawing data creation processing for the lower drawing frame 215b is executed, In step S1204, it is determined whether it is a transfer timing to the image processing device 206 or not. The processes in steps S1201 to S1204 are the same as the processes in steps S1001 to S1004 in the third embodiment.

  If it is determined in step S1204 that it is the transfer timing to the image processing device 206, it is the transfer timing to the area corresponding to the upper display area 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 in the device buffer 214 in step S1205. It is determined whether or not. If it is the transfer timing to the area corresponding to the upper display area 96, in step S1206, transfer processing from the upper drawing frame 215a in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred at this time is executed, and the lower display area If it is the transfer timing to the area corresponding to 97, transfer processing from the lower drawing frame 215b in the unit frame area 215 to be transferred at this time is executed in step S1207. That is, in the present embodiment, the device buffer 214 is not distinguished from the upper device frame 214a and the lower device frame 214b, and the horizontal line area corresponding to the upper display area 96 and the horizontal line area corresponding to the lower display area 97 are separated. Line areas are alternately arranged.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1204, after executing the process of step S1206 or after executing the process of step S1207, the drawing process is terminated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as already described, the device buffer 214 is not distinguished from the upper device frame 214a and the lower device frame 214b, and the horizontal line region corresponding to the upper display region 96 and the lower display are displayed. The horizontal line areas corresponding to the areas 97 are alternately arranged. With the above-described configuration, the image processing device 206 does not distinguish between the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 when drawing data on the liquid crystal display unit 91. By sequentially outputting each drawing data in ascending or descending order of unit area addresses in the device buffer 214, images corresponding to the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 are displayed. This eliminates the need for the image processing device 206 to distinguish which one of the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 outputs the drawing data when drawing on the liquid crystal display unit 91.

  Instead of the configuration of the present embodiment, the drawing data corresponding to the upper display area 96 and the drawing data corresponding to the lower display area 97 are displayed in the vertical direction when drawing data is created in each unit frame area 215. The drawing data in a state of being alternately arranged may be created.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the multi-display process by the display CPU 182 is different from that in the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the multi-display process in this embodiment. Also, in the following description, FIG. 39 is referred to as appropriate in the description of the effects performed based on the execution of the multi-display process.

  In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the symbol display device 29 is displaying the symbol variation. If the symbol display is not being displayed, the multi-display processing is terminated as it is. If the symbol variation display is in progress, it is determined in step S1302 whether the multi-display reach is being executed. If the multi-display reach is not being executed, it is determined in step S1303 whether it is the start timing of the multi-display reach.

  If it is not the start timing of multi-display reach, the multi-display processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing of multi-display reach, the processing of steps S1304 to S1306 is executed and then the multi-display is performed. The process is terminated. The processes in steps S1301 to S1306 are the same as steps S201 to S206 in the multi-display process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. The symbol display unit 61 is switched from the initial state to the multi-display state due to the execution of the processes of steps S1304 to S1306. In this state, an image for multi-display is displayed on the display surface 29a of the symbol display device 29.

  If it is determined in step S1302 that multi-display reach is in progress, it is determined in step S1307 whether or not it is the end timing of multi-display reach. If it is not the multi-display reach end timing, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not the vibration reach is being executed. If the vibration reach is not being executed, it is determined in step S1309 whether it is the start time of the vibration reach.

  If it is not the start timing of the reach for vibration, the multi-display process is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing of the reach for vibration, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, a process for starting the forward / reverse operation of the common drive motor 161 in the movable object unit 85 is executed. The specific contents of the process are the same as step S110 of the vibration process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, except that the object to be vibrated is not the shutter 151 but the mirror unit 141. By executing the process of step S1310, the mirror unit 141 is vibrated as shown in FIG.

  In the subsequent step S1311, the multi-display process ends after the flag is stored in the display area flag storage area of the vibration image provided in the work RAM 202 to set the display state of the vibration image. By setting the display state of the vibration image, as shown in FIG. 39, the symbol display device 29 is controlled to display as if the character included in the image directly viewed from the display surface 29a vibrates. The Specifically, in the display state of the vibration image, the drawing instruction information output from the display CPU 182 to the VDP 183 is a drawing in which a predetermined character vibrates as drawing data corresponding to the lower display area 97. You are instructed to create data. Further, the display of the character as if it is vibrating is performed in a state where the mirror unit 141 is vibrating.

  Incidentally, in the display state of the image for vibration, the symbol display device 29 is controlled to display as if the character included in the image directly viewed from the display surface 29a vibrates, but is visually recognized through the respective reflective surfaces 142a and 143a. Such display control is not performed for the image to be displayed, but instead, a blank area is reduced as compared with the case where the image is not a reach for vibration, and an area in which an image corresponding to each of the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a is displayed is displayed. Expanded. Thereby, when the mirror unit 141 vibrates, it is suppressed that a blank area | region is projected on each reflective surface 142a, 143a.

  Note that when the mirror unit 141 vibrates, in order to prevent the blank area from being projected on the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a, the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a are irrespective of whether or not the vibrating reach is being performed. The area in which the image corresponding to is displayed may be set in consideration of the case where the mirror unit 141 vibrates. Further, instead of the above-described configuration, the symbol display device 29 may be controlled to display as if the image viewed through each of the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a vibrates. The image display device 29 may be viewed through each of the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a. It is good also as a structure by which the symbol display apparatus 29 is display-controlled as if only the image to be vibrated.

  Returning to the description of the multi-display process, if it is determined in step S1308 that the vibration reach is in progress, it is determined in step S1312 whether it is the end timing of the vibration reach. If it is not the end timing of the reach for vibration, the multi-display processing is ended as it is, and if it is the end timing of the reach for vibration, the process proceeds to step S1313. In step S1313, processing for terminating the forward / reverse operation of the common drive motor 161 is executed. The specific contents of this process are the same as those in step S112 of the vibration process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, except that the object whose vibration is to be ended is not the shutter 151 but the mirror unit 141. By executing the processing in step S1313, the vibration of the mirror unit 141 is terminated.

  In subsequent step S1314, the display state flag of the image for vibration is deleted from the work RAM 202 to cancel the display state of the image for vibration, and then the multi-display processing is ended. When the display state of the image for vibration is canceled, the state where the character included in the image directly viewed from the display surface 29a is displayed as if it is vibrating is canceled.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1307 that the multi-display reach end timing has been reached, the processing in steps S1315 to S1317 is executed, and then the multi-display processing ends. The processes in steps S1315 to S1317 are the same as steps S208 to S210 in the multi-display process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. The symbol display unit 61 is returned from the multi-display state to the initial state due to the execution of the processes in steps S1315 to S1317.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the mirror unit 141 can be vibrated without vibrating the symbol display device 29 itself, and the player can visually recognize the state where the character is vibrating on the display surface 29a. be able to. When the symbol display device 29 itself is vibrated, there is a concern about the failure of the symbol display device 29 or the display control device 83 integrated with the symbol display device. However, according to the present embodiment, the inconvenience is not caused. The player can be provided with an effect that both the mirror unit 141 and the character displayed on the display surface 29a vibrate.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the heat emission control device 68 performs a heat dissipation control process. The heat dissipation control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The heat dissipation control process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  In step S1401, it is determined whether or not a multi display state is set. In the sound emission control device 68, the command for effect transmitted from the main control device 65 is received as in the first embodiment. In the sound emission control device 68, whether or not the symbol display unit 61 is switched to the multi display state by the received command, and when switching to the multi display state, the switching start timing and the return timing to the initial state are set. To grasp. In step S1401, it is determined based on the grasp result whether or not a multi display state is set.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the contents of the effect and the duration of the effect are determined in the sound emission control device 68 based on the command for the effect transmitted from the main control device 65, and the determined content is displayed. The image is displayed on the symbol display device 29 by being transmitted to the CPU 182. In this configuration, the sound emission control device 68 grasps the switching start timing and the return timing based on the determined content of the effect and the duration of the effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the content of the effect and the duration of the effect are performed by the display CPU 182 as in the first embodiment, and the display CPU 182 and the sound emission control device 68 Bidirectional communication is possible, and the content of the effect determined by the display CPU 182 and the duration of the effect may be transmitted to the sound emission control device 68. In this case, the sound emission control device 68 may be configured to grasp the switching start timing and the return timing based on the content of the effect received from the display CPU 182 and the duration of the effect.

  If not in the multi-display state, the heat dissipation control process is terminated after setting the low heat dissipation state in step S1402. On the other hand, if it is in the multi-display state, after setting the high heat dissipation state in step S1403, the heat dissipation control process ends. In the low heat dissipation state, a drive signal for low heat dissipation is output to the heat dissipation fans 86 and 87, and the heat dissipation fans 86 and 87 are operated so as to obtain an air flow rate corresponding to low heat dissipation. On the other hand, in the high heat dissipation state, a drive signal for high heat dissipation is output to the heat dissipation fans 86 and 87, and the airflow for high heat dissipation is set so that the airflow per unit time is set higher than that for low heat dissipation. The heat radiating fans 86 and 87 operate as described above.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the multi-display state in which the heat generation amount may increase in the display control device 83, the heat radiation of the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 is larger than that in the initial state. It can be suitably performed. Further, in the initial state, the amount of air blown from the heat dissipating fans 86 and 87 is smaller than that in the multi-display state, thereby contributing to energy saving.

  It should be noted that even in the initial state, the air flow rate of the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 may be adjusted in accordance with the heat generation amount of the display control device 83. It is good also as a structure by which the ventilation by the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 is performed only in the display state.

<Seventh Embodiment>
The present embodiment focuses on the fact that the symbol display device 29 itself can be movably provided without impairing the aesthetic appearance of the area visible to the player through the opening 35 of the game board 23 in the first embodiment. It is a form, and a concrete structure differs from the said 1st Embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  41 (a) and 41 (b) are front views simply showing a configuration of a region visible through the symbol display device 231 and the opening 232 in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, the display surface 231a of the symbol display device 231 has a rectangular shape. The length dimension of the display surface 231a in the longitudinal direction is set to be larger than any side of the opening 232, and the length dimension of the display surface 231a in the short side direction is larger than any side of the opening 232. Is set too small. Note that the symbol display device 231 cannot perform multi-view display, unlike the first embodiment.

  The back side of the symbol display device 231 is connected to the display drive motor 233, and is provided so as to be rotatable about a rotation axis extending in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. The rotation axis is located at the center or near the center of the display surface 231a and at the center or near the center of the opening 232. As the rotation position of the symbol display device 231, as shown in FIG. 41A, the first rotation position in which the long side direction of the display surface 231a is the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10, and as shown in FIG. The second rotation position where the longitudinal direction of the display surface 231a is the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Note that the display surface 231a faces the front of the pachinko machine 10 at any rotational position.

  In the case of the above configuration, a gap is generated between the peripheral edge of the display surface 231a and the peripheral edge of the opening 232 regardless of the rotation position of the symbol display device 231. In contrast, shutter members 234 and 235 for closing the gap are provided. As the shutter members 234 and 235, as shown in FIG. 41A, a first shutter member 234 for closing the gap in a situation where the symbol display device 231 is disposed at the first rotation position, 41 (b), a second shutter member 235 for closing the gap in a situation where the symbol display device 231 is disposed at the second rotation position is provided.

  The first shutter member 234 is disposed so as to sandwich the symbol display device 231 vertically, and is driven by a first shutter drive motor 236 provided separately from the display drive motor 233, so as to be within the opening 232. It moves to the closed position where it has been placed and the retracted position that has sunk from the opening 232. As shown in FIG. 41A, the first shutter member 234 is disposed at the closed position in the situation where the symbol display device 231 is disposed at the first rotation position, and the peripheral portion and the opening portion of the symbol display device 231. The gap between the peripheral portion of H.232 is closed, and as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the symbol display device 231 is arranged at the retracted position in the state where it is arranged at the second rotation position.

  The second shutter member 235 is disposed so as to sandwich the symbol display device 231 from side to side, and is provided on a second shutter drive motor 237 provided separately from the display drive motor 233 and the first shutter drive motor 236. It is driven to move to a closed position disposed in the opening 232 and a retracted position submerged from the opening 232. The second shutter member 235 is disposed at the retracted position in the situation where the symbol display device 231 is disposed at the first rotation position as shown in FIG. 41A, and the symbol as shown in FIG. 41B. In the situation where the display device 231 is disposed at the second rotation position, the display device 231 is disposed at the closed position to close the gap between the peripheral edge of the symbol display device 231 and the peripheral edge of the opening 232.

  According to the above configuration, since the symbol display device 231 itself is displaced so that the orientation of the display surface 231a is changed, the display mode can be diversified as compared with the configuration in which the symbol display device 231 is fixed so as not to be displaced. In addition, diversification of the display mode can be performed without impairing the aesthetic appearance of the region that is visible through the opening 232.

  In the configuration described above, the symbol display device 231 may vibrate as an effect, or the shutter members 234 and 235 may vibrate. In this case, since the symbol display device 231 and the shutter members 234 and 235 are driven by different drive motors 233, 236 and 237, the shutter members 234 and 235 vibrate when the symbol display device 231 vibrates. It is possible to prevent the symbol display device 231 from vibrating when the shutter members 234 and 235 vibrate. With this configuration, it is easy to prevent the gap between the symbol display device 231 and the shutter members 234 and 235 from being exposed in the state of being visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 during the production of the vibration. .

  In addition, the shutter members 234 and 235 vibrate as an effect, but the symbol display device 231 itself does not vibrate, and instead the symbol included in the image displayed on the display surface 231a vibrates. The display device 231 may be configured to be display-controlled. When the symbol display device 231 itself is vibrated, there is a concern about the failure of the symbol display device 231 or the display control device integrated with the symbol display device 231, for example. According to the present embodiment, this problem does not occur. Further, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that both the shutter members 234 and 235 and the character displayed on the display surface 231a vibrate.

  Further, when the display control device is integrated with the symbol display device 231 or the symbol display device 231, a heat radiating fan for radiating heat from the display control device may be provided. In this case, the heat dissipating fan is not integrated with the symbol display device 231 but is provided so as not to move together with the symbol display device 231, so that the rotating shaft of the symbol display device 231 or the display drive motor 233 is provided. On the other hand, the heat dissipation fan can be provided without being affected by the weight load of the heat dissipation fan.

  Note that a gap is generated between the peripheral portion of the symbol display device 231 and the peripheral portion of the opening 232 only when the symbol display device 231 is disposed at either the first rotation position or the second rotation position. When configured, one of the first shutter member 234 and the second shutter member 235 may be omitted. In addition, a gap is not generated between the opening 232 on both sides of the display surface 231a in each of the first rotation position and the second rotation position, but the opening is formed only on one side with respect to the display surface 231a. In the configuration in which a gap is generated between the first and second shutter members 232, the first shutter member 234 and the second shutter member 235 may not be provided so as to sandwich the symbol display device 231 therebetween.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a part of the other weight load is canceled by one weight load of the pair of movable objects driven by the common drive motor 161 of the movable object unit 85 in the first embodiment. In particular, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 42 is a front view schematically showing the symbol display device 241 and the center frame 242 in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the symbol display device 241 is installed so that the display surface 241a is visible through the opening 242a formed by the center frame 242. Unlike the first embodiment, the symbol display device 241 is not provided so as to be movable, and cannot perform multi-view display.

  A movable object unit 243 is provided on the roof portion of the center frame 242. The movable object unit 243 includes a first movable object 244, a second movable object 245, and a common drive motor 246 that drives them. The first movable object 244 and the second movable object 245 are disposed so as to sandwich the common drive motor 246 therebetween, and the first movable object 244 and the second movable object 245 are connected through a power transmission member 247. The power transmission member 247 has a large number of teeth juxtaposed along the direction in which both the movable objects 244 and 245 are connected, and these teeth mesh with the drive roller of the common drive motor 246.

  A first driven roller 248 is provided on a connection path between the common drive motor 246 and the first movable object 244. By providing the first driven roller 248, the first movable object 244 moves in the vertical direction by driving the common drive motor 246. A second driven roller 249 is provided on a connection path between the common drive motor 246 and the second movable object 245. By providing the second driven roller 249, the second movable object 245 moves in the vertical direction by driving the common drive motor 246. The first movable object 244 and the second movable object 245 appear and disappear with respect to the opening 242a in accordance with the effect on the display surface 241a of the symbol display device 241. That is, the first movable object 244 and the second movable object 245 are effect members for performing effects. Since the first movable object 244 and the second movable object 245 are decorated, they also have a function as a decorative member for production.

  In the above configuration, the load due to the weight of the first movable object 244 acts in the canceling direction with respect to the load due to the weight of the second movable object 245, and the load due to the weight of the second movable object 245 is the weight of the first movable object 244. Acts in the cancellation direction against the load caused by. As a result, the driving force required for the common drive motor 246 can be reduced, and the common drive motor 246 can be reduced in size accordingly.

  Further, the first movable object 244 and the second movable object 245 have the same or substantially the same weight, and the drive roller of the common drive motor 246 is disposed at an intermediate position between the driven rollers 248 and 249. Yes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the loads of the movable objects 244 and 245 from being biased in either the left-right direction (horizontal direction) with respect to the drive roller, and the load is substantially the same in the left-right direction with respect to the drive roller. It takes to become. Thus, by making the load substantially the same in the left-right direction, the load applied to the drive roller can be suppressed and the driving force required for the common drive motor 246 can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the load varies greatly in the left-right direction. Therefore, the common drive motor 246 can be reduced in size.

  If the weights of the first movable object 244 and the second movable object 245 are greatly different, the position of the drive roller is set so that the load applied to the drive roller is the same or substantially the same in the left-right direction. Good.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the characteristic configurations in the above embodiments may be mutually applied in a predetermined combination. In addition, each characteristic configuration of the following different forms may be applied individually to each characteristic configuration in each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other. Moreover, you may mutually apply each characteristic structure of said each embodiment and the following another form by a predetermined combination. Furthermore, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment that is not exemplified as an application target of the configuration.

  (1) It is not limited to the structure using the heat radiation fans 86 and 87 as the cooling means, and a heat sink may be used as the cooling means, or a heat pump or a Peltier element may be used. Even in these configurations, it is preferable to provide the cooling means excluding the object to be displaced by the display drive motor 121 from the viewpoint of suppressing the weight load on the display drive motor 121.

  (2) The object to be cooled by the cooling means is not limited to the integrated body of the symbol display device 29 and the display control device 83 or the accommodation space 102 defined by the bulging portion 103. For example, the display control device In the configuration in which 83 is not integrated with the symbol display device 29 and only the symbol display device 29 is driven and displaced by the display drive motor 121, the symbol display device 29 may be a cooling target. Further, the display drive motor 121 may be included in the cooling target of the cooling unit by changing the positional relationship between the display drive motor 121 and the cooling unit. Further, the common drive motor 161 may be included in the cooling target of the cooling unit by changing the positional relationship between the common drive motor 161 and the cooling unit.

  Further, when the symbol display device 29 is disposed at the inclined position, the parts that approach the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 are not limited to both the display CPU 182 and the VDP 183, and may be either one of them, instead of or In addition, a predetermined driving driver may be used.

  (3) The position where the cooling means is installed is not limited to the bottom inclined portion 107 of the bulging portion 103. For example, any one of the ceiling inclined portion 105, the back surface portion 106, and the side wall portion 108 of the bulging portion 103 is used. It may be. Moreover, the cooling means may be installed in the accommodation space 102, and a plurality of cooling means may be installed in different parts.

  (4) The heat dissipation fans 86 and 87 may be driven and controlled by a control device different from the sound emission control device 68 such as the main control device 65 and the display control device 83. In addition, the driving power may be constantly supplied in a situation where the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on instead of being controlled by the control device. Further, a detection sensor that detects the temperature in the display control device 83 or the accommodation space 102, and a state in which driving power is supplied to the heat radiating fans 86 and 87 based on a detection result of the detection sensor, or a state in which no driving power is supplied. A switching circuit for switching between the two may be provided.

  (5) When the initial state of the symbol display unit 61 is compared with the multi-display state, the display controller 83 may be configured to generate more heat in the initial state. In this case, the display controller 83 approaches the cooling unit in the low heat generation state among the high heat generation state and the low heat generation state. In the case of this configuration, the display control device 83 in a state where the temperature is rising due to the display control device 83 approaching the cooling means in a state where the temperature of the display control device 83 is rising via the high heat generation state. Can be cooled satisfactorily. Further, the heat generation amount may be varied regardless of the position of the symbol display device 29. Even in this case, when the temperature of the display control device 83 is rising, the display control device 83 approaches the cooling unit, so that the display control device 83 in a state where the temperature is rising is cooled well. It becomes possible.

  Further, the integrated unit of the symbol display device 29 and the display control unit 83 is basically arranged at a position close to the cooling means, and only between the integrated unit and the cooling unit at a predetermined timing such as a predetermined reach display. The distance may be increased. In this case, a state where the cooling efficiency of the symbol display device 29 and the display control device 83 is high is a normal state. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which the relative distance between the said integrated object and a cooling means is the same or substantially the same regardless of the position of the said integrated object.

  (6) Contrary to the configuration of the sixth embodiment, the cooling means is in a low heat dissipation state in the initial state of the symbol display unit 61, and the cooling means is in a high heat dissipation state in the multi-display state of the symbol display unit 61. It is good. In this case, when the distance between the integrated unit of the symbol display device 29 and the display control unit 83 and the cooling unit is long, the cooling unit is in a high heat dissipation state, and the distance between the integrated unit and the cooling unit is short. Since the cooling means is in a low heat dissipation state, the cooling means can contribute to energy saving compared to a configuration in which the cooling means is always in a high heat dissipation state, and even if the distance between the integrated object and the cooling means is long. It becomes possible to increase the cooling efficiency of things.

  (7) It is possible to provide the cooling means while reducing the influence of the weight load on the display drive motor 121 by providing the symbol display device 29 in a displaceable manner and excluding the cooling means from the displacement target of the display drive motor 121. When paying attention to the remarkable effect of being able to do so, the configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine provided with a symbol display device that does not perform multi-view display.

  In this case, the symbol display device is not limited to a configuration that rotates around one end, and may be configured to rotate around a rotation axis in the thickness direction of the symbol display device. It is good also as a structure which slide-moves to a horizontal direction or a depth direction. Even in these configurations, the cooling means may be configured to cool the accommodation space of the symbol display device, and when the symbol display device is arranged at a predetermined position, the symbol display device becomes a cooling means more than before. In a configuration where the cooling means is a heat radiating fan, the air blowing surface of the heat radiating fan faces the symbol display device side in any position where the symbol display device is arranged in any position. Also good.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the display control apparatus is integrated with the symbol display apparatus, and the cooling means is provided in the side near a display control apparatus rather than a symbol display apparatus. Even if the multi-view display is not performed, more sprites or more effects are used when the integrated object is closer to the cooling means than when it is farther than that. Thus, the display control device may be configured to be in a high heat generation state. In this case, it becomes possible to efficiently cool the display control device in a high heat generation state by the cooling means.

  (8) When attention is paid to the configuration other than the heat dissipation fans 86 and 87 such as the configuration related to the multi-view display and the configuration related to the movable object unit 85, the heat dissipation fans 86 and 87 may be omitted. The display device 29 or the display control device 83 may be integrated.

  (9) In the first embodiment, in a situation where multi-view display is not performed, the drawing data is created only in the upper drawing frame 215a in each unit frame area 215. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The drawing data may be created only in the lower drawing frame 215b. In addition, a frame in which drawing data is created among the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b may be appropriately changed. In this case, it is necessary to be able to recognize for which frame the drawing data is created in the VDP 183.

  (10) In the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display unit 91 is limited to a configuration in which the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 are alternately arranged for each unit pixel area 95. Instead, a configuration in which the plurality of unit pixel regions 95 are alternately arranged may be employed. However, in order to satisfactorily display an image on the display surface 29a, the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 are alternately arranged for each unit pixel area 95 as in the first embodiment. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which they are arranged.

  (11) In the first embodiment, in a situation where multi-view display is not performed, drawing data is created only in one of the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b of each unit frame area 215. Instead, the image may be displayed in only one of the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97. In this case, a ground color such as black display or white display is displayed on the other of the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97. According to this configuration, the time required to complete transfer of drawing data for one frame and the time required to complete drawing for one frame in the image processing device 206 are higher than those in the first embodiment. Since there is room, it is possible to create drawing data using many sprites and create drawing data using many effects in the VDP 183 using this time. However, in order to allow the player to visually recognize the image displayed on the display surface 29a without making the player feel uncomfortable, the image is displayed on both the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 as in the first embodiment. Is preferably displayed.

  (12) In the first embodiment, the cache area 211 and the drawing area 212 are distinguished in advance in the video RAM 204. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display CPU 182 and the VDP 183 use the character ROM 203. An area may be set as appropriate when transferring image data from or creating drawing data. In this case, each time an area is set in the display CPU 182 or VDP 183, the address needs to be specified in the display CPU 182 or VDP 183.

  (13) In the first embodiment, in a situation where multi-view display is not performed, the VDP 183 transfers drawing data only to one of the upper device frame 214a and the lower device frame 214b of the device buffer 214, and The image processing device 206 may store the drawing data in each of the upper device frame 214a and the lower device frame 214b. In this case, although the processing load of the image processing device 206 is increased as compared with the first embodiment, the processing load of the VDP 183 can be reduced as compared with the first embodiment.

  (14) In the first embodiment, the large number of unit pixel regions 95 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 are divided into two groups of the upper display region 96 and the lower display region 97. However, the present invention is not limited to this. There is nothing, and it may be divided into three or more groups.

  Incidentally, as a case of being divided into three groups, a configuration in which triple view display is performed is conceivable. Specifically, a large number of horizontal line regions arranged in the vertical direction in the liquid crystal display unit 91 are divided into an upper display region (first display region) and a central display region (second display region) when performing triple view display. In addition to being assigned to the lower display area (third display area), these areas are arranged in order from the top: upper display area → lower display area → center display area → upper display area → lower display area → center display The areas are set so as to be arranged in units of one pixel in the order of. In addition, the parallax barrier panel 94 allows the image displayed in the upper display area to be visible only from diagonally above the display surface 29a, and allows the image displayed in the center display area to be viewed only from the front of the display surface 29a. Thus, the image displayed in the lower display area is formed so as to be visible only from obliquely below the display surface 29a.

  In this configuration, a reflection surface that reflects the image displayed in the upper display area toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is provided above the display surface 29, and the image displayed in the lower display area is displayed. By providing a reflection surface that reflects toward the front of the machine 10 below the display surface 29a, the images displayed in the three display areas can be viewed together from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the triple view display is performed vertically, and may be configured in the horizontal direction.

  In addition, when the display is divided into four or more groups, the area for dual view display or triple view display in the vertical direction and the area for dual view display or triple view display in the horizontal direction are one liquid crystal display. A configuration mixed in the unit 91 is conceivable.

  Even in the above-described configuration, in a situation where multi-view display is not performed, a configuration in which only drawing data corresponding to a part of the display area, specifically, one group of display areas, is created, The frame area 215 can be used effectively, and the time required for creating drawing data can be used to display many sprites and many effects.

  (15) By creating drawing data corresponding to a part of the display area in a predetermined situation, the video RAM 204 can be used effectively, or the time required to create the drawing data can be increased by using many sprites and a lot of time. When paying attention to the remarkable effect that it can be divided to display this effect, the configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine provided with a symbol display device that does not perform multi-view display.

  (16) In the third embodiment, each unit frame area 215 is divided into the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both the frames 215a and 215b are used. In each unit frame area 215, an area corresponding to the upper display area 96 and an area corresponding to the lower display area 97 are alternately set for each unit pixel area 95. It is good. In this case, the VDP 183 creates drawing data without distinguishing between the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 and transfers the undrawn drawing data to the image processing device 206.

  (17) In the third embodiment, a synthesis buffer is provided in the VDP 183 or the video RAM 204 separately from each unit frame area 215, and in each unit frame area 215, drawing data corresponding to the upper display area 96 and lower The drawing data corresponding to the side display area 97 is created separately, and after the creation, one drawing data corresponding to the upper display area 96 and one drawing data corresponding to the lower display area 97 are created in the composition buffer. The drawing data may be synthesized so that drawing data arranged alternately for each unit pixel area 95 is created. In this case, the VDP 183 transfers drawing data that is not distinguished into the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 to the image processing device 206.

  (18) When the display surface 29a is viewed, a plurality of display states are set such that at least one of the area or position in the display surface 29a where the image can be visually recognized is different from each other. However, by making the created drawing data corresponding to the display of the image at the same position and area on the display surface 29a, it is possible to go to the game without complicating the configuration related to the display control. When attention is paid to the remarkable effect that the degree of attention can be improved, the configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine provided with a symbol display device that does not perform multi-view display.

  As a configuration of the application target, for example, a configuration in which a shielding member that hides a part of the display surface 29a by being disposed at a position facing the display surface 29a in front of the display surface 29a is considered. In the said structure, the area | region of the display surface 29a which can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 will be changed by switching and arrange | positioning a shielding member with a 1st position and a 2nd position. In this case, by creating drawing data corresponding to the same unit pixel area on the display surface 29a regardless of whether the shielding member is disposed at the first position or the second position. In the configuration in which the shielding member is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent the configuration related to display control from becoming extremely complicated.

  In addition, as said shielding member, the thing of an opening-and-closing type like a door and the retractable type like a shutter can be considered. Moreover, in the structure of the said shielding member, the symbol display apparatus 29 may be provided so that a displacement is impossible. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which a shielding member operate | moves so that the visible position may be changed, maintaining the visible area in the display surface 29a. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which a shielding member operate | moves so that a visible area may be changed, maintaining the position which can be visually recognized in the display surface 29a.

  In addition to the configuration of the shielding member, a configuration in which the area of the display surface 29a exposed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is changed by moving the symbol display device 29 itself is also conceivable. In this case, by creating drawing data corresponding to the same unit pixel area on the display surface 29a regardless of the position where the symbol display device 29 is arranged, the symbol is displayed as described above. In the configuration in which the area of the display surface 29a that can be visually recognized is changed in accordance with the movement of the display device 29 itself, the configuration related to display control is suppressed from becoming extremely complicated.

  (19) In the first embodiment, data transfer is performed in parallel when drawing data is transferred from the VDP 183 to the image processing device 206. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and serial data transfer is possible. It is good also as composition which is performed. In this case, the signal path SC1 for the drawing signal may be configured by a single signal path instead of a plurality of signal paths arranged in parallel. In this configuration, whether the dual view display is performed or not, the data transfer order is performed in the same manner in the unit of the horizontal line region or in the unit of the unit pixel region 95. By doing so, the configuration relating to data transfer can be simplified. Further, when serial data transfer is performed, information on which unit pixel area 95 corresponds to the data related to the transfer is also transferred, so that the dual view display is performed and the row. In any case, data transfer can be performed in the same manner.

  Further, in the configuration in which the signal path SC1 for the drawing signal is provided in parallel with the horizontal line area as in the first embodiment, the timing at which data transfer is performed in each signal path. It is good also as a structure which does not overlap.

  (20) As in the first embodiment, the number of signal paths corresponding to the horizontal line area corresponding to one of the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 is arranged in parallel in the drawing signal signal path SC1. Even when the dual view display is not performed in the VDP 183 as in the third embodiment, the configuration of the drawing data corresponding to the upper display area 96 and the drawing data corresponding to the lower display area 97 is You may apply to the structure where both are produced.

  Further, as in the third embodiment, the signal path SC1 for drawing signals is formed by arranging a number of signal paths corresponding to the horizontal line areas for the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 in parallel. Is applied to a configuration in which only the drawing data corresponding to one of the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 is created when dual view display is not performed in the VDP 183 as in the first embodiment. May be.

  (21) The entire display surface 29a is not configured to be capable of multi-view display, but is related to the creation of drawing data in each of the embodiments described above for a configuration in which multi-view display is possible on part of the display surface 29a. A characteristic configuration or a characteristic configuration related to drawing data transfer may be applied. In this case, for example, an area where the execution of the multi-view display is not possible, specifically, an area where the parallax adjustment by the parallax barrier panel 94 is not performed is either when the multi-view display is performed or when the multi-view display is not performed. However, when drawing data is created and multi-view display is not performed for an area where multi-view display can be performed, specifically, an area where parallax adjustment is performed by the parallax barrier panel 94 is performed. Is configured such that only drawing data corresponding to a part of a plurality of regions having mutually different directions that can be viewed is created. Thereby, when the multi-view display is not performed, the information capacity of the created drawing data can be reduced.

  (22) A plurality of display states are set such that at least one of the area or position in the display surface 29a where the image can be viewed when the display surface 29a is viewed is different from each other. Even if drawing data is transferred in the same manner, the remarkable effect that the attention degree to the game can be improved without making the configuration of the image processing device 206 extremely complicated. When paying attention to the above, the configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine provided with a symbol display device that does not perform multi-view display.

  As a configuration of the application target, for example, a configuration in which a shielding member that hides a part of the display surface 29a by being disposed at a position facing the display surface 29a in front of the display surface 29a is considered. In the said structure, the area | region of the display surface 29a which can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 will be changed by switching and arrange | positioning a shielding member with a 1st position and a 2nd position. In this case, drawing data corresponding to the same unit pixel area on the display surface 29a is transferred to the image processing device 206 regardless of whether the shielding member is disposed at the first position or the second position. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the configuration of the image processing device 206 from becoming extremely complicated in the configuration in which the shielding member is provided as described above.

  In addition, as said shielding member, the thing of an opening-and-closing type like a door and the retractable type like a shutter can be considered. Moreover, in the structure of the said shielding member, the symbol display apparatus 29 may be provided so that a displacement is impossible. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which a shielding member operate | moves so that the visible position may be changed, maintaining the visible area in the display surface 29a. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which a shielding member operate | moves so that a visible area may be changed, maintaining the position which can be visually recognized in the display surface 29a.

  In addition to the configuration of the shielding member, a configuration in which the area of the display surface 29a exposed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is changed by moving the symbol display device 29 itself is also conceivable. In this case, the drawing data corresponding to the same unit pixel area on the display surface 29a is transferred to the image processing device 206 regardless of the position of the symbol display device 29. As described above, the configuration of the image processing device 206 can be suppressed from being extremely complicated in the configuration in which the region of the display surface 29a that can be visually recognized is changed in accordance with the movement of the symbol display device 29 itself.

  (27) In the first embodiment, with respect to the movable object unit 85, the shutter 151 that is the first movable part and the mirror unit 141 that is the second movable part include the common drive motor 161 and the common gears 162 to 164. Although the configuration is arranged in front and rear in front of the mounted drive region, the configuration is not limited to this, and may be configured in front and rear in the rear of the drive region.

  (28) In the first embodiment, the movable object unit 85 may be configured such that a drive motor is individually provided for each of the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151. In this case, the drive motor of the mirror unit 141 may be configured such that the first movable portion is the mirror unit 141 and the second movable portion is a weight member that moves at a position that is not visually recognized by the player. Even in this configuration, the driving force necessary for the drive motor can be reduced by canceling the heavy load between the mirror unit 141 and the weight member. Further, the driving motor of the shutter 151 may be configured such that the first movable portion is the shutter 151 and the second movable portion is a weight member that moves at a position that is not visually recognized by the player. Even in this configuration, the driving force necessary for the driving motor can be reduced by canceling the heavy load between the shutter 151 and the weight member.

  Further, in the configuration in which the drive motor is individually provided for each of the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 as described above, a large mirror unit is provided as the first movable portion for the drive motor of the mirror unit 141. In addition, a small mirror unit may be provided as the second movable part. In this case, for example, in a situation where multi-view display is performed on the symbol display device 29, an image can be displayed by switching between a large unit and a small unit that appear in a visible range through the opening 35. The size of the area to be changed can be changed satisfactorily. Note that this configuration may be applied to a configuration in which the shutter 151 is not provided.

  Further, in the configuration in which the drive motor is individually provided for each of the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 as described above, a large shutter is provided as the first movable portion for the drive motor of the shutter 151. In addition, a small shutter may be provided as the second movable part.

  (29) In the first embodiment, the electric actuator provided in common for the plurality of movable parts in the movable object unit 85 is not limited to the rotary motor that rotates the output shaft 161a, and reciprocates the output shaft. A solenoid to be moved may be used. In this case, the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 are provided in a seesaw manner, and the seesaw type transmission member is pushed and pulled due to the reciprocating movement of the output shaft, so that the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 move in opposite directions. The structure which performs is considered. In the seesaw-type configuration, the output shaft may be directly attached to one movable object.

  (30) A common electric actuator is provided for a plurality of movable parts, and when one of the movable parts moves in a biased direction, the other moves in a direction against the biasing force. In the case where attention is paid to the remarkable effect that the required driving force can be reduced in the common electric actuator by providing each of these movable parts, the movable means provided around the symbol display device 29 is configured. You may apply as a structure which concerns on other movable means.

  For example, the above-described configuration may be applied to a blocking permission member that blocks or allows a game ball to pass, such as the payout device 76. Specifically, a blocking permission member for blocking or permitting the passage of game media by moving in and out of the medium passage as the first movable portion is provided, and a weight member is provided as the second movable portion.

  Further, for example, the first movable unit and the second movable unit may move in the horizontal direction instead of moving in the vertical direction. In this case, the first movable part is urged in a predetermined direction by a spring or the like, and the second movable part is urged in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by a spring or the like different from the spring. To do. Even in this case, an urging force is applied to each of the first movable portion and the second movable portion, and the urging forces of each other act in the cancel direction.

  (31) In the first embodiment, a common electric actuator is provided for a plurality of movable parts, and when one movable part moves in a biased direction, the other is biased. When attention is paid to a configuration other than the configuration in which each of the movable parts is provided so as to move in a direction against the above, the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 may be driven by different drive motors. In this case, the symbol display device 29 and the mirror unit 141 may be operated by a single drive motor, or the symbol display device 29 and the shutter 151 may be operated by a single drive motor.

  (32) In the first embodiment, not having both the function of vibrating the symbol display device 29 and the function of vibrating the movable object unit 85, but the function of vibrating the symbol display device 29 or the movable object unit. It is good also as a structure provided with either one of the functions which vibrate 85. FIG.

  (33) The first embodiment may be configured such that an effect of vibrating the symbol display device 29 and an effect of vibrating the mirror unit 141 are performed in a situation where the symbol display unit 61 is in the multi-display state. Moreover, it is good also as a structure where a vibration effect is performed at the timing in the middle in which the symbol display unit 61 is switched from an initial state to a multi display state, or the timing in the middle of being switched from a multi display state to an initial state.

  (34) In the first embodiment, an effect of vibrating the symbol display device 29 and an effect of vibrating the shutter 151 may be performed simultaneously. Even in this case, by providing separate drive motors for the symbol display device 29 and the shutter 151, the degree of vibration can be made different from each other. For example, the vibration of the symbol display device 29 can be set to be weak and the vibration of the shutter 151 can be set to be strong.

  (35) The vibration effect in the fifth embodiment may be performed in a situation where the symbol display unit 61 is in the initial state.

  (36) In addition to the display drive motor 121 for displacing the symbol display device 29, a common drive motor 161 for displacing the movable means such as the mirror unit 141 and the shutter 151 is provided. When paying attention to the remarkable effect that the displacement of the means can be performed satisfactorily, the configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine provided with a symbol display device that does not perform multi-view display.

  For example, a plurality of symbol display devices are provided, and the display surface of one symbol display device is always visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the display surface of the other symbol display device is accompanied by the movement of the symbol display device. Thus, in the configuration in which the position can be switched to the position where it can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the position where it cannot be viewed, an electric actuator may be individually provided for each symbol display device.

  Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a vibration motor for the symbol display device 29 and a vibration motor for the movable means are provided separately. In this case, the displacement of the symbol display device 29 means that the symbol display device 29 vibrates, and the displacement of the movable means corresponds to that the movable means vibrates.

  (37) In each of the above-described embodiments, the timing at which the vibration effect and the multi-view display effect are performed is arbitrary, and may be configured as a jackpot effect instead of a game-play effect, for example.

  (38) The angle of the symbol display device 29 in the multi-display state of the symbol display unit 61 is not limited to the angle at which the display surface 29a is inclined by 35 degrees, but may be other angles such as 45 degrees. . Further, the angle of the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a in the multi-display state of the symbol display unit 61 is not limited to an angle perpendicular to the display surface 29a, and may be an acute angle or an obtuse angle with respect to the display surface 29a. It may be.

  (39) The parallax barrier panel 94 may be configured to display control so that the position of the light shielding layer 98 is changed. Specifically, a liquid crystal display unit may be used as the parallax barrier panel 94. In this case, by preventing the light shielding layer from being displayed on the parallax barrier panel 94 in the initial state of the symbol display unit 61, the image quality of the display surface 29a in the initial state can be improved.

  (40) The reflection surfaces 142a and 143a may be arranged below the display surface 29a. In this case, the symbol display device 29 is disposed so that the display surface 29a is inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the reflective surfaces 142a and 143a are disposed so as to be inclined upward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Thus, the area where the image is displayed is inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the display surface 29a and the reflective surfaces 142a and 143a are arrange | positioned at right and left. In this case, the display surface 29a and the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a are located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and the display surface 29a and the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a are located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. By tilting the display surface 29a and the reflecting surfaces 142a and 143a in the front-rear direction, an area where an image is displayed is positioned closer to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 from one side to the other side of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Inclined state.

  Incidentally, when the display surface 29a and the reflective surfaces 142a and 143a are arranged on the left and right as described above, the display surface 29a is visible when viewed from the diagonally right front with respect to the display surface 29a. A right display area that is not visible when viewing the display surface 29a from the left front side, and a right display area that is visible when viewing the display surface 29a from the left front side with reference to the display surface 29a. It is good also as a structure by which the symbol display apparatus 29 is display-controlled so that it may have a left display area which cannot be visually recognized when the said display surface 29a is seen. In this case, the right display area and the left display area may be configured in units of vertical line areas. In this configuration, the right display area and the left display area are alternately arranged in units of vertical line areas for one line. The right display area and the left display area may be alternately arranged in units of vertical line areas for a plurality of lines. Further, the right display area and the left display area may be alternately arranged for each unit pixel area 95 or for each of the plurality of unit pixel areas 95 in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

  (41) Although the multi-view display is performed using the parallax barrier panel 94, the multi-view display may be performed using a prism or a lenticular lens. The image display unit for displaying an image is not limited to the liquid crystal display unit, and an organic EL display unit, a CRT, or the like may be used. The images displayed on these image display units are not limited to moving images, and may be still images.

  Further, instead of the image display unit, a decorative sheet in which a picture such as a pattern or a character is written on the front surface may be used. In this case, the decorative sheet is formed of glass or a synthetic resin material so as to have light transmissivity, and the picture to be written on the surface of the decorative sheet is such that the upper display picture and the lower display picture are in the vertical direction. The state is divided and arranged alternately. Then, a parallax barrier panel is provided corresponding to the upper display picture and the lower display picture, and a backlight for irradiating light is provided on the back surface of the decorative sheet. As a result, dual view display using a decorative sheet can be performed. Further, instead of the parallax barrier panel, a panel provided with a light shielding layer with a mechanical structure may be used.

  (42) When multi-view display is performed, the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a are not limited to the configuration in which a part of the display surface 29a is displayed, and the entire display surface 29a or substantially the entire region is displayed. It is good also as a structure. In this case, the area where the image is displayed can be further increased.

  (43) When the opening 35 of the game board 23 is viewed from a predetermined position in front of the pachinko machine 10, each display of the multi-view display on the display surface 29a is visible on each of the display surface 29a and the reflective surfaces 142a and 143a. If it becomes, it is good also as a structure where one of the display surface 29a or the reflective surfaces 142a and 143a does not incline in the front-back direction.

  (44) In the case of a configuration in which only an image having the same shape is displayed even if it is inverted upside down in the upper display area 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91, in the drawing process for multi-view display in the VDP 183 of the display control device 83 A configuration may be adopted in which drawing data is not created in the state of being upside down. The image data of the image displayed in the upper display area 96 of the liquid crystal display unit 91 and the image data of the image displayed in the lower display area 97 are stored independently in the character ROM 203 or the like. In this case, among the image data of the image displayed in the upper display area 96, the image data for multi-view display is stored in the character ROM 203 or the like in a vertically inverted state in advance so that it can be displayed for multi-view display. A configuration may be adopted in which the upside down process is not executed in the drawing process.

  (45) The image processing device 206 may be configured to execute the drawing process based on a dedicated hardware circuit instead of executing the drawing process based on the program data.

  (45-1) In this configuration, the drawing signal path SC1 as in the first embodiment configures the number of horizontal line areas constituting the upper display area 96 (that is, the lower display area 97). When applied to a configuration in which unit signal paths are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the number of horizontal line regions), the following configuration may be used. In other words, the VDP 183 transfers a portion of the created drawing data corresponding to the unit pixel area 95 constituting each horizontal line area to the image processing device 206 through a unit signal path corresponding to each horizontal line area. And In this case, the VDP 183 outputs unit signal paths that correspond one-to-one with the data constituting each horizontal line region among the drawing data created in the upper drawing frame 215a in the situation where the first transfer signal is output. And the unit signal path corresponding to the data constituting each horizontal line region in the one-to-one correspondence among the drawing data created in the lower drawing frame 215b in the situation where the second transfer signal is output. Forward through. In this regard, each unit signal path corresponds to one horizontal line area in the upper display area 96 and also corresponds to one horizontal line area in the lower display area 97.

  In the above configuration, the image processing device 206 has an adjustment circuit that associates each unit signal path with each horizontal line area of the liquid crystal display unit 91, and when data for the horizontal line area is transferred from one unit signal path. An output circuit that sequentially outputs the data to each unit pixel area 95 of the horizontal line area, and each unit signal path to each horizontal line area of the upper display area 96 when the first transfer signal is received. A switching circuit that associates each unit signal path with each horizontal line area of the lower display area 97 when the second transfer signal is received may be provided. With this configuration, the image processing device 206 does not require the device buffer 214 for storing and holding drawing data for one frame.

  In the above configuration, the VDP 183 may be configured to sequentially transfer the data of each horizontal line area instead of transferring simultaneously, or may be configured to transfer simultaneously. Further, in the case of the above configuration, one unit of information when drawing data is transferred can be regarded as data corresponding to one unit pixel region 95, and can be regarded as data for one column of the horizontal line region. You can also.

  (45-2) In the configuration in which the dedicated hardware circuit is provided, the signal path SC1 for the drawing signal has a one-to-one correspondence with the number of horizontal line regions in the liquid crystal display unit 91 as in the second embodiment. In the configuration in which unit signal paths are provided and drawing data corresponding to only one of the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 is transferred when dual view display is not performed. When applied, the following configuration may be used. In other words, the VDP 183 transfers a portion of the created drawing data corresponding to the unit pixel area 95 constituting each horizontal line area to the image processing device 206 through a unit signal path corresponding to each horizontal line area. And In this case, the VDP 183 outputs the data constituting each horizontal line area among the drawing data created in the upper drawing frame 215a in a situation where a non-multi signal is being output as a part of the entire unit signal path. Each horizontal line area of the drawing data generated in the upper drawing frame 215a and the lower drawing frame 215b in a situation where the multi-signal is output while being transferred to the line area on a one-to-one basis. Are transferred via unit signal paths corresponding one-to-one.

  In the configuration described above, the image processing device 206 includes an adjustment circuit that associates each unit signal path with each horizontal line area of the liquid crystal display unit 91, and a horizontal line area from one unit signal path when a multi-signal is received. From the multi-unit output circuit that sequentially outputs the data to each unit pixel region 95 in the horizontal line region, and one unit signal path when the non-multi signal is received. When data corresponding to the horizontal line area is transferred, the non-multi data is sequentially output to each unit pixel area 95 in both the horizontal line area and a predetermined horizontal line area continuous thereto. The output circuit may be provided. With this configuration, the image processing device 206 does not require the device buffer 214 for storing and holding drawing data for one frame.

  In the above configuration, the VDP 183 may be configured to sequentially transfer the data of each horizontal line area instead of transferring simultaneously, or may be configured to transfer simultaneously. Further, in the case of the above configuration, one unit of information when drawing data is transferred can be regarded as data corresponding to one unit pixel region 95, and can be regarded as data for one column of the horizontal line region. You can also.

  (45-3) In the configuration in which the dedicated hardware circuit is provided, the signal path SC1 for the drawing signal has a one-to-one correspondence with the number of horizontal line regions in the liquid crystal display unit 91 as in the third embodiment. When applied to a configuration in which unit signal paths are provided, the following configuration may be used. In other words, the VDP 183 transfers a portion of the created drawing data corresponding to the unit pixel area 95 constituting each horizontal line area to the image processing device 206 through a unit signal path corresponding to each horizontal line area. And

  In the above configuration, the image processing device 206 has an adjustment circuit that associates each unit signal path with each horizontal line area of the liquid crystal display unit 91, and when data for the horizontal line area is transferred from one unit signal path. An output circuit that sequentially outputs the data to each unit pixel area 95 of the horizontal line area may be provided. With this configuration, the image processing device 206 does not require the device buffer 214 for storing and holding drawing data for one frame.

  In the above configuration, the VDP 183 may be configured to sequentially transfer the data of each horizontal line area instead of transferring simultaneously, or may be configured to transfer simultaneously. The above configuration may be applied to the fourth embodiment. Further, in the case of the above configuration, one unit of information when drawing data is transferred can be regarded as data corresponding to one unit pixel region 95, and can be regarded as data for one column of the horizontal line region. You can also.

  The configurations (45-1), (45-2), and (45-3) may be applied to configurations in which dual view display is performed in the horizontal direction.

  (46) The unit frame area 215 and the device buffer 214 are not limited to the configuration having the same unit area as the number of unit pixel areas 95, and the number of unit frames is larger than the number of unit pixel areas 95. It is good also as a structure provided with the unit area.

  (47) In the configuration in which the window panel 54 is arranged to be inclined upward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and when a general player plays a game, the window panel 54 is looked down. When performing multi-view display, it is not essential that at least one of the display surface 29a or the reflection surfaces 142a and 143a is inclined in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. For example, one of the display surface 29a and the reflective surfaces 142a and 142b stands up in the vertical direction and the other is laid down in the horizontal direction, so that both are placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 54. It may be configured to be in an inclined state. Note that this configuration may be applied to any of the above embodiments.

  (48) The upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 are not limited to the configuration set for each horizontal line area, and the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 are in the vertical and horizontal directions. In either case, a configuration may be adopted in which the pixels are alternately arranged in units of one pixel or a plurality of pixels. In this case, the positions where the light shielding layer 98 and the transmissive layer 99 are formed on the parallax barrier panel 94 are also visible from the upper side of the upper display area 96 and not visible from the lower side, and the lower display area 97 is visible from the lower side. It is necessary to adjust so that it can be seen from above.

  In the configuration in which the upper display area 96 (second image area) and the lower display area 97 (first image area) are alternately arranged in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as described above, the VDP 183 is used. Thus, the drawing data created in the upper drawing frame 215a and the drawing data created in the lower drawing frame 215b are combined in correspondence with the physical positions of the upper display area 96 and the lower display area 97 in the liquid crystal display unit 91. Then, the combined drawing data may be transferred to the image processing device 206. Thereby, even if the signal path SC1 for the drawing signal includes a plurality of signal paths corresponding to the horizontal line area, the drawing data can be transferred satisfactorily.

  (49) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 83 is controlled by the sound emission control device 68 on the basis of the command output from the main control device 65. Instead, the main control device 65 is used. The display control device 83 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 68 on the basis of a command output from. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 68 and the display control device 83 are separately provided, the control devices 68 and 83 may be provided as a single control device. In addition, one function of the sound emission control device 68 and the display control device 83 may be integrated into the main control device 65, and both functions of the sound light emission control device 68 and the display control device 83 are included in the main control device 65. It may be aggregated.

  (50) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or game balls in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

  When the present invention is applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine or a pachinko machine is combined with a slot machine, a display composed of a display surface and a reflective surface through a window or window panel formed on the front of the gaming machine. What is necessary is just to set it as the structure which provides a symbol display unit so that an area | region can be visually recognized from the game machine front. In this case, the reel (rotating body) may be provided separately from the symbol display unit, and the symbol display unit may be substituted for the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. In a gaming machine equipped with display means (symbol display device 29) for performing predetermined display in a display area (display surface 29a),
Display drive means (display drive motor 121) for displacing the display means;
Cooling means (heat radiation) that cools a cooling target that is at least one of a portion that generates heat or is heated by causing a predetermined display in the display area of the display means and a portion that generates heat or is heated by displacing the display means. Fans 86, 87)
With
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the cooling means is provided so as not to be displaced together with the display means so as to be excluded from a displacement target by the display drive means.

  According to the feature A1, the display means can be displaced by providing the display driving means. As a result, it is possible to produce not only an effect by causing the display means to perform a predetermined display but also an effect of displacing the display means itself. Therefore, the degree of attention to the display means can be increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased due to this.

  In addition, since the cooling means is provided, the influence of heat generation on the display means surroundings by causing the display area of the display means to perform a predetermined display or the influence of heat generation on the surroundings of the display means by displacing the display means. Is reduced. In this case, the cooling means is provided so as not to be displaced together with the display means and excluded from the object to be displaced by the display driving means. As a result, the cooling effect can be obtained while the influence of the weight load on the cooling means does not reach the display driving means.

  As described above, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game while allowing the heat generated due to the performance of the display means to be cooled well.

Feature A2. In a gaming machine equipped with display means (symbol display device 29) for performing predetermined display in a display area (display surface 29a),
Display drive means (display drive motor 121) for displacing the display means;
Cooling means (radiating fans 86, 87) for cooling a cooling object that is at least one of a location that generates heat or a location that is heated by causing a predetermined display in the display area of the display means,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the cooling means is provided so as not to be displaced together with the display means so as to be excluded from an object to be displaced by the display driving means.

  According to the feature A2, the display means can be displaced by providing the display drive means. As a result, it is possible to produce not only an effect by causing the display means to perform a predetermined display but also an effect of displacing the display means itself. Therefore, the degree of attention to the display means can be increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased due to this.

  Further, the provision of the cooling means reduces the influence of heat generation on the display means surroundings by causing the display area of the display means to perform a predetermined display. In this case, the cooling means is provided so as not to be displaced together with the display means and excluded from the object to be displaced by the display driving means. As a result, the cooling effect can be obtained while the influence of the weight load on the cooling means does not reach the display driving means.

  As described above, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game while allowing the heat generated due to the performance of the display means to be cooled well.

  Feature A3. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the displacement range of the display means includes a position where the distance between the display means and the cooling means is relatively far and close.

  According to the feature A3, since the distance between the display unit and the cooling unit may become short with the displacement of the display unit, the cooling efficiency of the display unit or its surroundings increases with the displacement of the display unit. A situation can occur.

Feature A4. The display state of the display means includes a high heat generation state (a state in which multi-view display is performed) and a low heat generation state (a multi-view display) in which the amount of heat generated by performing a predetermined display in the display area is relatively high and low. A state in which view display is not performed), and a transition between the high heat generation state and the low heat generation state is performed in accordance with the displacement of the display means,
The cooling means is provided to cool the cooling target when the position of the display means is at least a position corresponding to the high heat generation state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A4, since the transition between the high heat generation state and the low heat generation state is performed with the displacement of the display unit, for example, the predetermined display in the display area is complicated with the displacement of the display unit. It is possible to Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the display means, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game as a result. In this configuration, when the display means is at least a position corresponding to the high heat generation state, the cooling means is provided so as to cool the object to be cooled. The influence on the surroundings is reduced.

Feature A5. The cooling means includes air blowing means (heat radiating fans 86 and 87) for sending air,
The air blowing means is provided such that the air blowing surface faces the display means side regardless of the displacement position of the display means when a predetermined display is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A5, the display unit can be displaced and the cooling unit is not displaced together with the display unit because the blowing surface of the blowing unit faces the display unit side regardless of the displacement position of the display unit. In the configuration described above, it is possible to cool the display unit or its periphery regardless of the displacement position of the display unit.

  The air blowing means is fixed at a position where at least a part of the display means is included on an extended line of the air blowing surface that sends out air regardless of the displacement position of the display means when a predetermined display is performed. It is good also as composition which has.

  Further, when the display means is displaced in a state where a predetermined display is performed, the display means reciprocates by rotating in a single specific direction or reciprocates by sliding movement in a single specific direction. It is good also as a structure. In this case, the blowing means may be installed so that the direction of the blowing surface corresponds to the specific direction.

Feature A6. Comprising display control means (display control device 83) for controlling display of the display means, the display control means being integrated with the display means so as to be displaced together with the display means,
Any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the object to be cooled includes at least one of the display control unit or a portion heated by heat generated by display control performed by the display control unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A6, since the display control unit is integrated with the display unit, it is possible to improve the configuration related to the exchange of information between the two. Further, when display control of the display means is performed by the display control means, it is considered that the display control means generates heat. However, since the cooling means is provided, the heat generation display control means and its surroundings are considered. The influence on is suppressed. In this case, the structure of the feature A2 is provided, and the cooling unit is not integrated with the display unit and the display control unit. As a result, the above effects can be achieved while suppressing the influence of the weight load on the display driving means.

Feature A7. The display control state in the display control means includes a high heat generation state (a state in which multi-view display is performed) and a low heat generation state (a state in which multi-view display is not performed). And a transition between the high heat generation state and the low heat generation state is performed in accordance with the displacement of the display means,
The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein the cooling means is provided to cool the object to be cooled when the position of the display means is at least a position corresponding to the high heat generation state. .

  According to the feature A7, the transition between the high heat generation state and the low heat generation state in the display control unit is performed in accordance with the displacement of the display unit. The display can be complicated. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the display means, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game as a result. In this configuration, when the display means is in a position corresponding to at least the high heat generation state, the cooling means is provided so as to cool the object to be cooled. The influence of heat around the means or the display control means is reduced.

Feature A8. The display control means is integrated with the display means by being installed on a surface side different from the display area in the display means,
The cooling means is provided to cool the object to be cooled in any of the case where the position of the display means corresponds to the high heat generation state and the position corresponding to the low heat generation state. The feature A7 is characterized in that the position corresponding to the high heat generation state is closer to the display control means than the position corresponding to the low heat generation state. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A8, the cooling unit is provided such that the distance between the cooling unit and the display control unit is closer in the position corresponding to the high heat generation state than in the position corresponding to the low heat generation state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the cooling efficiency at the position corresponding to the high heat generation state while enabling the cooling of the cooling target at both the position corresponding to the high heat generation state and the position corresponding to the low heat generation state.

  The cooling means is a position for cooling the object to be cooled in both the case where the position of the display means is a position corresponding to the high heat generation state and the position corresponding to the low heat generation state, The position corresponding to the high heat generation state may be fixed at a position where the distance from the heat generation source is closer than the position corresponding to the low heat generation state.

Feature A9. The display control means is integrated with the display means by being installed on a surface side different from the display area in the display means,
The cooling means includes air blowing means (heat radiating fans 86 and 87) for sending air,
The air blowing means is provided such that the air blowing surface faces the display control means side regardless of the displacement position of the display means when a predetermined display is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A9, since the air blowing surface of the air blowing unit faces the display control unit side regardless of the displacement position of the integral unit of the display unit and the display control unit, the unitary object can be displaced and the cooling unit However, the display control means can be cooled regardless of the displacement position of the integrated object.

  Feature A10. The position where at least a part of the display control means is included on the extended line of the air blowing surface that sends out air regardless of the displacement position of the display means when the display control by the display control means is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the gaming machine is fixed to the game machine.

  According to the feature A10, the effect of the feature A9 can be achieved with a relatively simple configuration in which the relationship between the direction of the air blowing surface and the position of the display control unit is adjusted.

  When the display means is displaced in a state where display control is performed by the display control means, the display control means reciprocates by rotating in a single specific direction or slides in a single specific direction. It is good also as a structure which reciprocates by a movement. In this case, the blowing means may be installed so that the direction of the blowing surface corresponds to the specific direction.

Feature A11. A partition portion (bulging portion 103) for partitioning the displacement area (accommodating space 102) of the display means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the object to be cooled includes the displacement region.

  According to the feature A11, the cooling effect can be obtained regardless of the displacement position of the display unit by cooling the displacement region by the cooling unit.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the cooling means is installed outside the displacement area.

  According to the feature A12, the cooling unit can be provided without reducing the displacement region.

Feature A13. The partition portion includes a high-order side partition portion (ceiling inclined portion 105) and a low-order side partition portion (bottom inclined portion 107) whose height position is relatively high and low,
The cooling means is installed in the lower side section, and a vent hole (ceiling side vent hole 171) is formed in the higher side section to allow air in the displacement area to escape to the outside of the displacement area. The gaming machine according to Feature A11 or A12, wherein:

  According to the feature A13, the cooling effect of the displacement region is enhanced by providing the vent hole having the exhaust function at a high position with respect to the position where the cooling means is provided.

  Feature A14. A gaming machine component (sound-emission control device unit 63) that operates when a predetermined operation is performed in the gaming machine is mounted on the high-order partition section, and the gaming machine component is installed in the communication section. The gaming machine according to Feature A13, wherein the gaming machine is disposed at a position where at least a part is included on an extension line in the penetration direction of the air hole with respect to the air hole and does not block the air hole.

  According to the feature A14, the high-order partition section has a function of partitioning the displacement area, a function of exhausting air in the displacement area, and a function of mounting gaming machine components. It can be used effectively.

  Feature A15. The gaming machine according to any one of features A11 to A14, wherein the display driving means is installed outside the displacement area.

  According to the feature A15, the display unit can be displaced while suppressing the influence of the heat generation on the displacement region due to the operation of the display driving unit. Further, since the cooling capacity required for the cooling means is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the display driving means is installed in the displacement region, the cooling means can be reduced in size and the cooling means can be simplified.

Feature A16. The display means is capable of differentiating the display when the display area is viewed from the first direction and the display when the display area is viewed from the second direction,
Furthermore, a reflection means (mirror unit 141) having a reflection surface (reflection surfaces 142a, 143a) for reflecting the display in the display area is provided.
In the displacement range of the display means, the display that is visible from the second direction in the display area is reflected by the reflecting surface and is visible from the first direction. Both the display that can be viewed from the first direction and the display that can be viewed from the second direction in the display area and reflected by the reflecting surface can be viewed from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine. As described above, the special display position in which the positional relationship between the display area and the reflection surface is set and the non-special display position different from the special display position are included. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A16, in a state where the display unit is arranged at the special display position, it is possible to perform predetermined display in each of the display area and the reflection surface, and further, different display can be performed in each of the display area and the reflection surface. Can be done. Thereby, compared with the structure where a predetermined display is performed only in the display area, it is possible to increase the size of the area where the predetermined display is performed.

  Further, since the displacement range of the display means includes not only the special display position but also a non-special display position different from the special display position, for example, by switching these positions during the game, a predetermined display can be made. Can be switched by a method different from the display content. Therefore, the degree of attention to a predetermined display can be increased, and the degree of attention to a game can be increased due to this.

  Furthermore, the provision of the cooling means can suppress the influence even if the amount of heat generation increases when the predetermined display is performed in each of the display area and the reflection surface as described above, and the cooling. By providing the means so as not to be displaced together with the display means, the above-described effects can be achieved while suppressing the influence of the weight load on the display drive means.

Feature A17. The display means is capable of differentiating the display when the display area is viewed from the first direction and the display when the display area is viewed from the second direction,
Furthermore, a reflection means (mirror unit 141) having a reflection surface (reflection surfaces 142a, 143a) for reflecting the display in the display area is provided.
In the displacement range of the display means,
A display visible from the second direction in the display area is reflected from the reflecting surface and is visible from the first direction, and a display visible from the first direction in the display area. And the display area so that both the display that is visible from the second direction and reflected by the reflection surface are visible from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine. A special display position where the positional relationship is set, and
A non-special display position in which the positional relationship between the display area and the reflective surface is set so that the display in the display area is not reflected by the reflective surface;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein:

  According to the feature A17, in a state where the display unit is arranged at the special display position, it is possible to perform predetermined display in each of the display area and the reflective surface, and furthermore, different display can be performed in each of the display area and the reflective surface. Can be done. Thereby, compared with the structure where a predetermined display is performed only in the display area, it is possible to increase the size of the area where the predetermined display is performed.

  Further, the displacement range of the display means includes not only the special display position but also a non-special display position different from the special display position, and a predetermined display is not projected on the reflecting surface at the non-special display position. For example, by switching the size of the area where the predetermined display is performed in the middle of the game, the way of performing the predetermined display can be switched by a method different from the display content. Therefore, the degree of attention to a predetermined display can be increased, and the degree of attention to a game can be increased due to this.

  Furthermore, the provision of the cooling means can suppress the influence even if the amount of heat generation increases when the predetermined display is performed in each of the display area and the reflection surface as described above, and the cooling. By providing the means so as not to be displaced together with the display means, the above-described effects can be achieved while suppressing the influence of the weight load on the display drive means.

Feature A18. A window panel (transparent panel 168) is provided on the display area front side of the gaming machine,
In the state where the display means is arranged at the special display position, the display area is visible from the first direction and the display area is visible from the second direction and The display area is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel so that both of the reflected display and the display can be visually recognized through the window panel. The gaming machine according to feature A16 or A17, characterized in that a direction of the crossing is a direction intersecting with the direction of the reflective surface.

  According to the feature A18, the special display position of the display means is a position where the display area is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel. Therefore, a space for providing an area where predetermined display is performed is provided. The area can be enlarged without expanding in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the area may be expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine. As compared with a configuration in which the area is simply expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine and the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the area in each direction.

  Furthermore, when a predetermined display is performed in each of the display area and the reflection surface, the direction in which the display area faces is a direction that intersects the direction in which the reflection surface faces, and thus the same area as the expanded area. Compared to the configuration in which the display means having the display area is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine can be reduced in order to expand the area where the predetermined display is performed.

  Feature A19. The gaming machine according to Feature A18, wherein the display area is parallel or substantially parallel to the window panel when the display means is disposed at the non-special display position.

  According to the feature A19, since the orientation of the display area is changed between the special display position and the non-special display position, the difference in configuration between the special display position and the non-special display position is clear. Become. In addition, by applying this configuration to a configuration in which a predetermined display is not reflected on the reflecting surface at the non-special display position, it becomes possible to improve the visibility of the display area at the non-special display position.

Feature A20. In a special display state where the display when the display area is viewed from the first direction and the display when the display area is viewed from the second direction are different from the special display state. In comparison, the amount of heat generated by causing the display area to perform a predetermined display increases.
The cooling means is provided so as to cool the object to be cooled when the position of the display means is at least the special display position, according to any one of features A16 to A19, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A20, in the configuration in which the area where the predetermined display is performed can be enlarged as described above, the influence of heat around the display unit when the area is enlarged is reduced. .

Feature A21. A display control means (display control device 83) for controlling the display means, the display control means being integrated with the display means so as to be displaced together with the display means;
The object to be cooled includes at least one of the portions heated by heat generated by the display control performed by the display control unit or the display control unit,
Furthermore, the display means is arranged at the special display position, and the display when the display area is viewed from the first direction is different from the display when the display area is viewed from the second direction. In a state where display control is performed by the display control unit so as to be in a special display state, the amount of heat generated by the display control unit is increased compared to a state where display control is not performed by the display control unit so as to be in the special display state. Configuration,
The cooling means is provided so as to cool the object to be cooled when the position of the display means is at least the special display position, according to any one of features A16 to A19, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A21, in the configuration in which the area where the predetermined display is performed can be enlarged as described above, the influence of heat around the display control unit when the area is enlarged is reduced. The

Feature A22. The display control means is integrated with the display means by being installed on a surface side different from the display area in the display means,
The cooling means is provided so as to cool the object to be cooled both when the position of the display means is the special display position and when the position is the non-special display position. The gaming machine according to feature A21, wherein the game machine is provided such that the distance between the display control means and the non-special display position is closer.

  According to the feature A22, since the cooling means is provided so that the distance between the display control means is closer in the case of the special display position than in the case of the non-special display position, In addition, it is possible to increase the cooling efficiency at the special display position where the amount of heat generation increases while enabling the cooling of the object to be cooled at any of the non-special display positions.

Feature A23. The display means includes an image display unit (liquid crystal display unit 91) for displaying an image in the display area,
When the display control unit performs display control of the display unit so as to be in at least the special display state, a plurality of first image areas (lower display areas 97) and a plurality of second image areas are displayed in the image display unit. An area (upper display area 96) is set, and the second image area is arranged between the first image areas, and the first image area is arranged between the second image areas. Display control of the image display unit,
The display means defines the light emission direction from the display area, thereby making it possible to visually recognize the first image displayed in the plurality of first image areas from the first direction. The gaming machine according to Feature A21 or A22, further comprising light defining means (parallax barrier panel 94) that allows the second image displayed in the second image area to be viewed from the second direction. .

  According to the feature A23, an image when the display area is viewed from the first direction can be different from an image when the display area is viewed from the second direction.

Feature A24. The display control unit generates drawing information of an image to be displayed on the image display unit and stores the drawing information in a drawing information storage unit (unit frame area 215) (steps S402, S502, and S503 in the VDP 183). Etc.)
When the display means is not controlled so as to be in the special display state, the drawing information creation means is controlled so that the display means is in the special display state as drawing information corresponding to an image for a unit time. The gaming machine according to Feature A23, wherein the drawing information storage means creates drawing information having a smaller information capacity than that used to store the drawing information.

  According to the feature A24, since the area necessary for the drawing information storage unit can be suppressed when the special display state is not achieved, for example, the drawing information storage unit can be effectively used. In addition, for example, in the case where the special display state is not set, it is expected that there will be room in processing time when drawing information corresponding to an image for a unit time is created. It becomes possible to do.

  However, in the above configuration, there is a concern that the heat generation amount of the display control means increases in the special display state, but since the cooling target is cooled by the cooling means at least in the situation where the heat generation amount increases, the special display state In this case, the influence of heat on the display control means or its surroundings is reduced.

Feature A25. The drawing information storage means stores first drawing information storage means for storing drawing information of an image displayed in the first image area when the display means is controlled to be in the special display state. An upper drawing frame 215a) and second drawing information storage means (lower drawing frame 215b) for storing drawing information of an image displayed in the second image area,
The drawing information creation means creates drawing information for each of the first drawing information storage means and the second drawing information storage means when the display means is controlled to be in the special display state. On the other hand, when the display means is not controlled so as to be in the special display state, drawing information is created in one of the first drawing information storage means and the second drawing information storage means. A gaming machine according to Feature A24.

  According to the feature A25, since the storage capacity necessary for the drawing information storage unit can be suppressed when the special display state is not established, the drawing information storage unit can be effectively used.

Feature A26. The display control means includes
Drawing information creation means for creating drawing information of an image to be displayed on the image display unit (functions for executing the processes of steps S402, S502, and S503 in the VDP 183);
Transfer means for transferring the drawing information created by the drawing information creation means to the display means via a transfer path (a function for executing the processes of steps S405, S408, S506, and S509 in the VDP 183);
With
The display means includes display execution means (image processing device 206) for displaying an image on the image display unit based on the drawing information transferred through the transfer path,
A case where the display means is not controlled so that the information capacity of the drawing information transferred by the transfer means via the transfer path in order to display an image for a unit time in the display area is in the special display state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A23 to A25, wherein the gaming machine is smaller than when the display means is controlled to be in the special display state.

  According to the feature A26, there is a concern that the heat generation amount of the transfer path increases in the special display state. However, since the cooling target is cooled by the cooling unit at least in a situation where the heat generation amount increases, the special display state is set. In this case, the influence of heat on the display control means or its surroundings is reduced.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature group A is effective for the following problems.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a big hit gaming state is triggered by the fact that a gaming ball has entered the start ball entering section provided in the gaming area. Done. Further, for example, in a display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the pattern is started on the display surface based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and according to the lottery result in the final stop display of the variation display. A display effect for one game time is displayed in which the stop result is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is a so-called jackpot gaming state transition winning, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in a gaming area, for example, is executed after a display effect for one game is executed, The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a game in which a game ball is fired so that a ball enters the start ball entering part and a lottery result is awarded when a ball enters the start ball part. It can be said that it consists of a game of checking whether or not.

  Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game. In order to increase the degree of attention of the game, in the game of launching a game ball as described above, a method of diversifying the flow mode of the game ball in the game area can be considered, and as described above, the lottery result for each game time In the game of confirming whether or not the game is successful, a method of diversifying the display pattern of the display effect performed every game time is conceivable.

  However, since the game area is limited for the former, there is a limit in trying to diversify the game, and for the latter, even if the display pattern for each game is diversified, attention to the game There is still a limit in terms of increasing the degree. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in increasing the degree of attention to games.

  On the other hand, in a gaming machine equipped with a display device, the display device and the electronic components provided in the control device for controlling the display device generate heat when executing the display of the variation of the picture on the display device. In this case, if the electronic component and its surroundings are not efficiently cooled, there arises a problem that the control device malfunctions.

  Note that the above problems are not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but also occur in other gaming machines equipped with a display device having a display surface.

  In addition, for any one of the features A1 to A26, the following features B1 to B15, the following features C1 to C16, the following features D1 to D20, the following features E1 to E11, the following features F1 to F13, and the following features G1 The configuration limited in any one of -G10 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 29) for displaying an image on a display surface (display surface 29a), and display control means (display control device 83) for controlling display of the display means,
The display control means includes drawing information creation means (such as a function for executing the processing of steps S402, S502, and S503 in the VDP 183) that creates drawing information and stores the drawing information in the drawing information storage means. In a gaming machine that is configured to display an image for a unit time on the display surface by outputting the drawing information stored in the storage means,
The drawing information creating means includes
As drawing information corresponding to the image for the unit time, first drawing information creating means for storing drawing information of a first information capacity in the drawing information storage means (function to execute the processing of steps S502 and S503 in the VDP 183, etc.) )When,
As the drawing information corresponding to the image for the unit time, the second information in which the area used for storing the drawing information in the drawing information storage means is smaller than the case where the drawing information of the first information capacity is stored. A gaming machine comprising: second drawing information creation means (such as a function of executing the process of step S402 in the VDP 183) that stores drawing information of capacity in the drawing information storage means.

  According to the feature B1, when the drawing information storage unit stores the drawing information of the first information capacity as the drawing information corresponding to the image for the unit time, and when the drawing information of the second information capacity is stored. It is switched according to the situation. Thereby, when displaying a fine image or a complicated image, the drawing information of the first information capacity is created, and when such drawing information is not required, the drawing information of the second information capacity is created. Can be created. When the drawing information having the second information capacity is created, for example, a part of the drawing information storage means is an empty area compared to the case where the drawing information having the first information capacity is created. Thus, it is possible to effectively use the free space. In addition, for example, it is expected that there is room in processing time when drawing information corresponding to an image for a unit time is created, so that it is possible to display many characters using this.

  Feature B2. When the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, the area where the image is displayed on the display surface is displayed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity. Image display adjustment means (a function for executing the processing of step S405 and step S408 in the VDP 183 of the first embodiment, the second The image processing device 206 according to the embodiment includes a function of executing the process of step S907).

  According to the feature B2, when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, the area where the image is displayed in the display surface is the image display based on the drawing information of the first information capacity. This is equivalent to the area where the image is displayed on the display screen when. Therefore, when drawing information having the second information capacity is created, it is difficult for the player who has visually recognized the display surface to feel uncomfortable.

Feature B3. The display surface is configured by arranging a large number of unit pixel regions (unit pixel regions 95),
The number of unit pixel areas used when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity is used when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity. Image display adjustment means (a function of executing the processing of steps S405 and S408 in the VDP 183 of the first embodiment, the image processing device 206 of the second embodiment The gaming machine according to Feature B1, further including a function of executing the process of step S907 in

  According to the feature B3, when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, the area where the image is displayed in the display surface is the image display based on the drawing information of the first information capacity. This is equivalent to the area where the image is displayed on the display screen when. Therefore, when drawing information having the second information capacity is created, it is difficult for the player who has visually recognized the display surface to feel uncomfortable.

Feature B4. The display surface is configured by arranging a large number of unit pixel regions (unit pixel regions 95),
The display means is controlled so that the plurality of unit pixel areas are divided to have a plurality of groups of image areas (upper display area 96, lower display area 97) on the display surface, and a single unit. Different groups of image areas are arranged in a predetermined direction for each pixel area or for each of the plurality of unit pixel areas. A configuration controlled to be arranged,
The drawing information of the first information capacity includes drawing information corresponding to all the image areas of the plurality of groups, and the drawing information of the second information capacity includes the drawing information of the plurality of groups of image areas. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the drawing information corresponds to a part of the drawing information.

  According to the feature B4, even when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, the drawing information corresponds to a part of the plurality of groups of image areas. The display means arranges image groups of different groups for each single unit pixel area or for each of the plurality of unit pixel areas in a predetermined direction on the display surface, so that the image groups of all groups have the same group. Control is performed such that another group of image areas is arranged between the image areas. Therefore, when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, the range in which the image is displayed within the display surface is displayed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity. In this case, it is possible to make the player recognize that the image is equivalent to the display range on the display screen.

  The display means is configured to be configured by unit pixel areas of the image areas and to be controlled so that a combination in which the single unit pixel areas are arranged in a predetermined order repeatedly exists in a predetermined direction. It is good.

  Moreover, the following can be considered as a configuration having technical features corresponding to this feature B4.

Feature B4 ′. The display means is controlled to have a plurality of first image areas (lower display areas 97) and a plurality of second image areas (upper display areas 96) on the display surface, and The second image area is arranged between the areas, and the first image area is controlled to be arranged between the second image areas.
The drawing information storage means stores a drawing information storage area (upper drawing frame 215a) for storing drawing information of an image displayed in the first image area when drawing information of the first information capacity is created. And a second drawing information storage area (lower drawing frame 215b) for storing drawing information of an image displayed in the second image area when drawing information of the first information capacity is created. And
The first drawing information creation means creates drawing information for each of the first drawing information storage area and the second drawing information storage area as the drawing information of the first information capacity, while the second drawing information The information creating means creates drawing information in one of the first drawing information storage area and the second drawing information storage area as the drawing information of the second information capacity. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B3.

  Feature B5. When display of an image is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, the same drawing is performed in a predetermined combination of image areas of different groups and adjacent to each other, Image display adjustment means for performing image display in all the image areas using the drawing information of the second information capacity (the processing of steps S405 and S408 in the VDP 183 of the first embodiment is executed) The game machine according to the feature B4, which is provided with a function, a function of executing the process of step S907 in the image processing device 206 of the second embodiment, and the like.

  According to the feature B5, even when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, the image is displayed in all the image areas. When the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity, the image is displayed on the display surface when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity. It is possible for the player to recognize that it is equivalent to the range.

  Moreover, the following can be considered as a configuration having technical features corresponding to this feature B5.

  Feature B5 '. Created in one of the first drawing information storage area and the second drawing information storage area by the second drawing information creation means when an image is displayed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity The image display adjustment means for drawing the drawn drawing information in the first image area as well as in the second image area (function to execute the processing of steps S405 and S408 in the VDP 183 of the first embodiment) And the image processing device 206 according to the second embodiment have a function of executing the process of step S907).

Feature B6. The display means is configured to be configured by unit pixel areas of each image area and to be controlled so that a combination in which the single unit pixel areas are arranged in a predetermined order repeatedly exists in a predetermined direction. ,
The image display adjusting means uses the drawing information of the second information capacity to perform the same drawing in each unit pixel area that constitutes the same combination, so that all the image areas are used. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, wherein an image is displayed.

  According to the feature B6, even when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, the image is displayed in all the image areas. When the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity, the image is displayed on the display surface when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity. It is possible for the player to recognize that it is equivalent to the range.

Feature B7. The display control unit executes transfer unit (steps S405, S408, S506, and S509 in the VDP 183) that transfers the drawing information generated by the drawing information generation unit to the display unit via a transfer path. Functions)
The display means includes
An image display unit (liquid crystal display unit 91) for displaying an image on the display surface;
Display execution means (image processing device 206) for displaying an image on the image display unit based on the drawing information transferred via the transfer path;
With
The image display adjustment means uses the drawing information of the second information capacity as drawing information corresponding to all the image areas when image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity. The game machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the game machine is configured to be transferred toward the display means.

  According to the feature B7, even when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, the drawing information corresponding to all the image areas is drawn using the drawing information of the second information capacity. It is transferred to the display means. Therefore, the display execution means is either in the case where the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity or in the case where the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity. A configuration in which similar processing may be executed can be achieved. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the complexity of the processing of the display execution means.

  Feature B8. The image display adjustment means is configured to transfer a plurality of drawing information of the second information capacity when the drawing information is transferred, based on the drawing information of the second information capacity. When image display is executed, drawing information corresponding to all the image areas is transferred to the display unit using the drawing information of the second information capacity. The gaming machine according to Feature B7, which is characterized.

  According to the feature B8, an excellent effect as described above can be obtained with a relatively simple configuration in which a part of drawing information corresponding to a part is transferred by a specific number.

  Feature B9. The transfer means is configured to transfer the drawing information of the second information capacity a plurality of times when image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity. When display of an image is executed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity, the drawing information of the first information capacity is divided and transferred over the specific plurality of times. The gaming machine according to Feature D8.

  According to the feature B9, whether the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity or the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity, The transfer unit can be configured to perform the same processing. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the complexity of the processing of the transfer means.

  Furthermore, according to this configuration, both when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity and when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity. A common transfer path can be used. In this case, the hardware configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which each dedicated transfer path is provided.

  Feature B10. The transfer means causes the display means to recognize the transfer information (first transfer signal, second transfer time) of the specific plurality of times that the drawing information for which transfer is being performed relates to the number of transfer times. The game machine according to Feature B9, wherein the game machine outputs a transfer signal.

  According to the feature B10, in the configuration in which the drawing information is transferred a plurality of times, the transfer information is transferred from the display control unit to the display unit, whereby the drawing information being transferred is displayed on the display unit. It is possible to uniquely recognize the number of transfer.

Feature B11. The display control unit executes transfer unit (steps S405, S408, S506, and S509 in the VDP 183) that transfers the drawing information generated by the drawing information generation unit to the display unit via a transfer path. Functions)
The display means includes
An image display unit (liquid crystal display unit 91) for displaying an image on the display surface;
Display execution means (image processing device 206) for displaying an image on the image display unit based on the transferred drawing information;
With
The image display adjusting means is identical to the drawing information of the second information capacity stored in the transfer information storage means when the image is displayed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity. The image is displayed in all the image areas by using the drawing information of the second information capacity by performing the drawing in the image areas of different groups and in a predetermined combination adjacent to each other. The gaming machine according to Feature B5 or B6, wherein

  According to the feature B11, the processing for displaying an image in all the image regions is executed by the display execution unit using the drawing information of the second information capacity, so that the processing load of the display control unit is reduced. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above while reducing the processing load of the display control means.

Feature B12. The display execution means includes
First information capacity handling means (function for executing the processing of step S908 in the image processing device 206) to display images in all the image areas using the drawing information of the first information capacity;
Second information capacity handling means (function to execute the processing of step S907 in the image processing device 206) that causes the image to be displayed in all the image areas using the drawing information of the second information capacity;
With
The transfer means causes the display means to recognize which of the drawing information of the first information capacity and the drawing information of the second information capacity should be used to display the image. (Non-multi signal, multi signal)
The image display adjustment means is configured to switch an execution target of the image display among the first information capacity correspondence means and the second information capacity correspondence means based on the situation recognition information. The gaming machine according to Feature B11.

  According to the feature B12, the display unit can satisfactorily switch between the first information capacity handling unit and the second information capacity handling unit.

Feature B13. The display means can change the image when the display surface is viewed from a plurality of different directions for each direction, and the plurality of directions correspond to the image areas of the plurality of groups on a one-to-one basis. And
The first drawing information creating means creates drawing information of the first information capacity in a special display state in which an image when viewed from a plurality of different directions is different for each direction.
The game according to any one of features B4 to B12, wherein the second drawing information creation means creates drawing information of the second information capacity when the special display state is not set. Machine.

  According to the feature B13, in the special display state, since it is possible to simultaneously display a plurality of images on a single display surface, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the display of the image. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. In this case, even if drawing information for some drawing areas is not created in a situation that is not in the special display state, there is no problem as compared with the case of the special display state. Therefore, the drawing information storage means can be effectively used by creating the drawing information having the second information capacity in this situation.

Feature B14. The plurality of directions includes a first direction and a second direction,
Further, reflecting means (mirror unit 141) having a reflecting surface (reflecting surfaces 142a, 143a) for reflecting an image on the display surface;
An image that is visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected by the reflective surface, and can be viewed from the first direction. Further, an image that is visible from the first direction on the display surface. And the display means at a special display position where both the image that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and that is reflected from the reflective surface are visible from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine Holding means for holding the reflecting means (torsion coil spring 116, display drive motor 121, common drive motor 161);
The gaming machine according to Feature B13, comprising:

  According to the feature B14, in a state where the display unit is arranged at the special display position, it is possible to display an image on each of the display surface and the reflection surface, and further, different images can be displayed on each of the display surface and the reflection surface. Display can be performed. Thereby, compared with the structure in which an image is displayed only on the display surface, the area in which the image is displayed can be increased.

Feature B15. The display control means further includes image information storage means (character ROM 203) that stores image information in advance.
Any one of the features B1 to B14, wherein the drawing information creation means creates the drawing information using image information transferred from the image information storage means to the drawing information storage means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B15, when the drawing information having the second information capacity is created, the drawing information storage unit can expand the area in which the image information read from the image information storage unit is written. Thereby, when drawing information of the second information capacity is created, it is possible to diversify the production such as using a moving image as the image.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature B group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display surface such as a liquid crystal display device are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a memory such as a video RAM in which drawing data created using the image data read from the memory is written. A predetermined image is displayed on the display surface using the drawing data written in the memory.

  Here, in gaming machines, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and as a method for improving the degree of attention, there are diversification of presentation modes by images, use of complex moving images and live-action images as images, etc. It is conceivable to do this However, if the capacity of the memory in which the drawing data is written is increased in order to diversify the production mode by the image, the initial cost increases accordingly. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  Note that the above problems are not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but also occur in other gaming machines equipped with a display device.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features B1 to B15, the features A1 to A26, the following features C1 to C16, the following features D1 to D20, the following features E1 to E11, the following features F1 to F13, and the following features G1. The configuration limited in any one of -G10 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 29) for displaying an image on the display surface (display surface 29a);
The display means is displayed so that the image for the unit time is displayed on the display surface by creating the drawing information used for displaying the image for the unit time and transferring the created drawing information. Display control means for controlling (display control device 83);
In gaming machines equipped with
The display control means includes
Special display control means (steps S204 to S182 in the display CPU 182) that makes at least one of the area or the position in the display surface where the image is visible when the display surface is viewed from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine differ from each other. A function for executing the process of step S206) and non-special display control means (a function for executing the process of steps S208 to S210 in the display CPU 182);
Regardless of whether control is performed by the special display control means or control by the non-special display control means, the created drawing information is the image of the image at the same position and area on the display surface. A gaming machine comprising drawing information creation means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 and S1003 in the VDP 183) that is adapted to display.

  According to the feature C1, a special display state and a non-special display state in which at least one of an area or a position in the display surface where an image can be visually recognized when the display surface is viewed from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine are different from each other Since it is set, there are a plurality of patterns for viewing the image. This makes it possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

  In this case, since the created drawing information corresponds to the display of the image at the same position and area on the display surface in either the special display state or the non-special display state, Compared to a configuration that corresponds to display of images at different positions and areas, it is possible to share a configuration related to creation of drawing information. Therefore, in the configuration in which the attention degree to the game is improved as described above, it is possible to suppress the configuration related to the display control from becoming extremely complicated.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the degree of attention to the game through the improvement of the degree of attention to display on the display means.

  In the feature C1, the display means is configured by arranging a large number of unit pixel regions in place of the configuration “so as to correspond to display of an image at the same position and area”. An image display unit that enables visual recognition of an image through the display surface by performing drawing (image output) on these unit pixel areas, and the drawing information creating unit is configured by the special display control unit. Whether the control is performed or the control is performed by the non-special display control means, the created drawing information is displayed in the same unit pixel area or displayed in the same unit pixel area. It is good also as a structure corresponding to.

  Further, in the feature C1, instead of the configuration of “so as to correspond to the display of the image at the same position and area”, the drawing information creating means is configured to display the drawing information on the same drawing area. It is good also as composition which performs creation.

Feature C2. Display means (symbol display device 29) for displaying an image on the display surface (display surface 29a);
The display means is displayed so that the image for the unit time is displayed on the display surface by creating the drawing information used for displaying the image for the unit time and transferring the created drawing information. Display control means for controlling (display control device 83);
In gaming machines equipped with
The display means can vary the type of image visually recognized according to the angle of viewing the display surface,
The display control means includes
Special display control means (a function for executing the processing of step S204 to step S206 in the display CPU 182) so as to be in a special display state in which the type of image visually recognized differs according to the viewing angle of the display surface;
Non-special display control means (a function for executing the processing from step S208 to step S210 in the display CPU 182) to be in a non-special display state in which different types of images are not viewed according to the viewing angle of the display surface. When,
Drawing information creating means for creating drawing information corresponding to the display of an image at the same position and area on the display surface in both the special display state and the non-special display state (Function for executing the processing of step S1002 and step S1003 in VDP 183);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C2, a special display state in which the types of images visually recognized according to the viewing angle of the display surface and a non-special display state in which different types of images are not visually recognized according to the viewing angle of the display surface Are set, there are a plurality of patterns for displaying an image on the display surface. Thereby, the attention degree to a game can be improved.

  In this case, since the created drawing information corresponds to the display of the image at the same position and area on the display surface in either the special display state or the non-special display state, Compared to a configuration that corresponds to display of images at different positions and areas, it is possible to share a configuration related to creation of drawing information. Therefore, in the configuration in which the attention degree to the game is improved as described above, it is possible to suppress the configuration related to the display control from becoming extremely complicated.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the degree of attention to the game through the improvement of the degree of attention to display on the display means.

  Note that, in the feature C2, in place of the configuration of “so as to correspond to the display of an image at the same position and area”, the display means includes a large number of unit pixel regions arranged side by side. An image display unit that enables visual recognition of an image through the display surface by performing drawing (image output) on these unit pixel areas, and the drawing information creating unit is configured by the special display control unit. Whether the control is performed or the control is performed by the non-special display control means, the created drawing information is displayed in the same unit pixel area or displayed in the same unit pixel area. It is good also as a structure corresponding to.

  Further, in the feature C2, the drawing information creating means replaces the configuration of “so as to correspond to the display of the image at the same position and area” with the drawing information generating means for the same drawing area. It is good also as composition which performs creation.

Feature C3. The display means includes an image display unit (liquid crystal display unit 91) for displaying an image on the display surface,
The image display unit is controlled to have a plurality of first image areas (lower display area 97) and a plurality of second image areas (upper display area 96), and between the first image areas. The second image area is arranged and the first image area is controlled to be arranged between the second image areas,
Furthermore, the display means defines the light emission direction from the display surface, thereby enabling the images displayed in the plurality of first image areas to be visually recognized from the first direction and the plurality of first images. A light defining means (parallax barrier panel 94) that enables the image displayed in the two-image area to be viewed from the second direction;
The special display control means, as the special display state, allows the first image to be visually recognized from the whole of the plurality of first image areas and is different from the first image from the whole of the plurality of second image areas. So that the second type of image is visible.
The non-special display control means is configured so that an image is visually recognized from one of the plurality of first image areas and the plurality of second image areas as the non-special display state, or A plurality of first image areas and a plurality of second image areas are distinguished from each other so that the same type of image can be viewed.
The drawing information creating means is adapted to make the created drawing information corresponding to the display of an image in the same image area in any of the special display state and the non-special display state. The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by:

  According to the feature C3, as a display state, a special display state in which the type of image visually recognized according to the angle at which the display surface is viewed is different from a state in which a different type of image is visually recognized according to the angle at which the display surface is viewed. A non-special display state can be set. In addition, in any of the special display state and the non-special display state, since the created drawing information corresponds to the display of the image in the same image area, the special display state and the non-special display It is possible to share a configuration related to creation of drawing information depending on the state.

  In the feature C3, the image display unit includes a large number of unit pixel regions arranged vertically and horizontally, and the image display unit includes the first image region and the first image region in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The second image area may be controlled to be alternately arranged for each unit pixel area.

Feature C4. The display control means includes drawing information storage means (unit frame area 215) for storing drawing information created by the drawing information creation means,
The drawing information storage means includes a first drawing information storage area (upper drawing frame 215a) for storing drawing information of an image displayed in the first image area, and an image displayed in the second image area. A second drawing information storage area (lower drawing frame 215b) for storing drawing information,
The drawing information creating means stores drawing information in both the first drawing information storage area and the second drawing information storage area in either the special display state or the non-special display state. The gaming machine according to Feature C3, wherein

  According to the feature C4, the drawing information is created in both the first drawing information creation area and the second drawing information creation area in any of the special display state and the non-special display state. It is possible to share the configuration related to the creation of.

Feature C5. The image display unit is configured by arranging a large number of unit pixel areas, the first image area is configured by a predetermined combination of the unit pixel areas, and the second image area is the unit pixel area. Is composed of a predetermined combination of
Further, the display control means includes a transfer means (function for executing the processing of step S1005 in the VDP 183) for transferring the drawing information to the display means.
The transfer means transfers the drawing information by transferring the information of one unit for a specific number, with the information for drawing the predetermined number of units of the unit pixel area as one unit. In any of the special display state and the non-special display state, the drawing information is transferred such that the information transfer unit and the specific number are the same. A gaming machine according to C4.

  According to the feature C5, since the drawing information is transferred in the same manner in both the special display state and the non-special display state, the configuration related to the transfer of the drawing information can be made common. Therefore, in the configuration in which the attention degree to the game is improved as described above, it is possible to suppress the configuration related to the display control from becoming extremely complicated.

  The transfer means may be configured to transfer the drawing information corresponding to the second image area after the transfer of the drawing information corresponding to the first image area is completed. The drawing information corresponding to the area for use and the drawing information corresponding to the area for the second image may be transferred at the same time. In addition, it is preferable that the transfer unit is configured to transfer drawing information through the same transfer path in any of the special display state and the non-special display state. In this case, since the configuration related to the transfer of the drawing information is common in both the special display state and the non-special display state, the configuration related to the transfer can be simplified.

Feature C6. The display control means includes transfer means (function for executing the processing of step S1005 in the VDP 183) for transferring the drawing information to the display means via a transfer path (drawing signal signal path SC1). ,
The display means identifies which of the image areas the drawing information transferred via the drawing information transfer path corresponds to the drawing information corresponding to the first image area. Display execution means (image processing device 206) for displaying an image in the first image area based on the drawing information corresponding to the second image area based on the drawing information corresponding to the second image area. And
The transfer means transfers the drawing information corresponding to the first image area and the drawing information corresponding to the second image area in either the special display state or the non-special display state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, wherein the gaming machine is transferred to the display unit via a route.

  According to the feature C6, in any of the special display state and the non-special display state, the display means identifies to which image area the transferred information corresponds, and the identification result The corresponding drawing may be performed. Therefore, in the configuration in which the attention degree to the game is improved as described above, it is possible to suppress the configuration related to the image output in the display unit from becoming extremely complicated.

Feature C7. The transfer path includes a number of unit paths corresponding to the image areas,
When the information is transferred from any one of the unit paths, the display execution unit performs the drawing based on the information on the image area corresponding to the transferred unit path, so that the drawing An image corresponding to information is displayed on the display surface,
The game according to Feature C6, wherein the transfer means transfers the drawing information using each unit path in either the special display state or the non-special display state. Machine.

  According to the feature C7, in either the special display state or the non-special display state, the display unit outputs the image output corresponding to the information transferred from each unit path to the image area corresponding to the unit path. You can do this. Therefore, in the configuration in which the attention degree to the game is improved as described above, it is possible to suppress the configuration related to the image output in the display unit from becoming extremely complicated.

Feature C8. The display means is capable of differentiating an image when the display surface is viewed from a first direction and an image when the display surface is viewed from a second direction,
A reflection means (mirror unit 141) having a reflection surface (reflection surfaces 142a, 143a) for reflecting an image on the display surface;
The special display control means can be visually recognized from the first direction by reflecting an image visible from the second direction on the display surface as the special display state. Both an image that is visible from the first direction on the display surface and an image that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected by the reflective surface are from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine. So that it becomes visible.
In any one of the features C2 to C7, the non-special display control unit is configured so that an image is not reflected on the reflecting surface as the non-special display state. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C8, unlike the non-special display state, different images can be displayed on the display surface and the reflection surface in the special display state. As a result, in the special display state, compared to the non-special display state, the area where the image is displayed can be enlarged while using the same display surface, so that the image display is performed in the special display state and the non-special display state. There will be a clear difference in the way they are played, and it will be possible to improve the degree of attention to the game by switching between these states.

Feature C9. A window panel (transparent panel 168) is provided on the display surface in front of the gaming machine,
In the special display state, both the image that is visible from the first direction on the display surface and the image that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected by the reflective surface are both The display surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel so that the display surface can be viewed from the predetermined position through the window panel, and the direction of the display surface is the direction of the reflective surface Intersects with
The gaming machine according to C8, wherein in the non-special display state, the display surface is parallel or substantially parallel to the window panel.

  According to the feature C9, in the special display state, since the display surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, a space for providing an area where an image is displayed is provided in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or the game The area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the machine, and even if the space for providing the area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, Compared with a configuration in which the area is expanded in the left-right direction, the area can be enlarged while suppressing expansion of the space for providing the area in each direction.

  In addition, when an image is displayed on each of the display surface and the reflection surface, the direction in which the display surface faces is a direction intersecting the direction in which the reflection surface faces. Compared to the configuration in which the display means having the display surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, the size in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine can be reduced in order to expand the area where the image is displayed.

  Furthermore, in the non-special display state, the display surface is parallel or substantially parallel to the window panel, so that the orientation of the display surface is changed between the special display state and the non-special display state. The difference is clear. Moreover, according to this structure, it becomes possible to improve the visibility of the display surface in a non-special display state.

Feature C10. The display means includes an image display unit (liquid crystal display unit 91) for displaying an image on the display surface,
The image display unit is controlled to have a plurality of first image areas (lower display area 97) and a plurality of second image areas (upper display area 96), and between the first image areas. The second image area is arranged and the first image area is controlled to be arranged between the second image areas,
Furthermore, the display means defines the light emission direction from the display surface, thereby enabling the images displayed in the plurality of first image areas to be visually recognized from the first direction and the plurality of first images. A light defining means (parallax barrier panel 94) that enables the image displayed in the two-image area to be viewed from the second direction;
The special display control means, as the special display state, allows the first image to be visually recognized from the whole of the plurality of first image areas and is different from the first image from the whole of the plurality of second image areas. So that the second type of image is visible.
The non-special display control means is configured so that an image is visually recognized from one of the plurality of first image areas and the plurality of second image areas as the non-special display state, or A plurality of first image areas and a plurality of second image areas are distinguished from each other so that the same type of image can be viewed.
The drawing information creating means draws the drawing information corresponding to the plurality of first image areas and the drawing information corresponding to the plurality of second image areas different from each other in the special display state. While creating the information, in the non-special display state, the drawing information is created so that the same drawing is performed on the first image region and the second image region of a predetermined combination adjacent to each other. The gaming machine according to Feature C8 or C9, wherein

  According to the feature C10, a special display state and a non-special display state can be set as the display state. In this case, in the non-special display state, the same drawing is performed for the first image area and the second image area adjacent to each other in a predetermined combination. The storage capacity required for storing the information to be stored in advance is reduced. Even in this case, the same drawing is performed on the first image area and the second image area in a predetermined combination adjacent to each other, so that the player who sees the image feels uncomfortable. It can be suppressed.

The display control means includes drawing information storage means (unit frame area 215) for storing drawing information created by the drawing information creation means,
The drawing information storage means includes a first drawing information storage area (upper drawing frame 215a) for storing drawing information of an image displayed in the first image area, and an image displayed in the second image area. A second drawing information storage area (lower drawing frame 215b) for storing drawing information,
The drawing information creating means creates different drawing information for the first drawing information storage area and the second drawing information storage area in the special display state, while in the non-special display state, The same drawing information may be created for the drawing information storage area and the second drawing information storage area.

  Feature C11. The special display control means is configured to perform drawing on the second image area so that the second image is displayed on the display surface in a state where the second image is reversed in a direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged. The gaming machine according to any one of features C8 to C10, wherein:

  The second image displayed on the display surface is reflected by the reflection surface, and is inverted in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged. On the other hand, according to the feature C11, since the image output for the second image area is performed in a state where the second image is inverted in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged, the image displayed on the reflection surface is Originally, a state that should be visually recognized by the player is obtained.

Feature C12. A drawing instruction unit (a function of outputting the drawing instruction information in the display CPU 182) for supplying drawing instruction information to the drawing information creating unit;
The drawing information creating means executes a creation process for creating drawing information corresponding to the drawing instruction information based on receiving the drawing instruction information;
The drawing instruction means supplies drawing instruction information so as to create drawing information corresponding to a state in which the image displayed in the second image area is inverted in the arrangement direction in the special display state. The gaming machine according to Feature C11, which is characterized in that.

  According to the feature C12, when creating the drawing information in the special display state, the image displayed in the second image area corresponds to a state in which the display surface and the reflecting surface are reversed in accordance with the drawing instruction information. Drawn drawing information is created. As a result, if the types of drawing instruction information supplied in the special display state and the non-special display state are different, images corresponding to each state can be displayed. There is no need to separately provide a dedicated process corresponding to information. Therefore, it is possible to share a configuration related to creation of drawing information.

Feature C13. The display control means includes
Image information storage means (character ROM 203) for storing image information in advance;
Drawing information storage means (unit frame area 215) for storing drawing information created using the image information by the drawing information creation means;
With
The drawing information creation means has the same information capacity as the drawing information storage means regardless of whether the special display control means controls or the non-special display control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C12, wherein the drawing information is created.

  According to the feature C13, the drawing information having the same information capacity is created in the drawing information storage means in any of the special display state and the non-special display state. It becomes possible to make it common.

Feature C14. The display unit includes an image display unit (liquid crystal display unit 91) that is configured by arranging a large number of unit pixel areas and drawing the unit pixel areas so that an image can be viewed through the display surface. )
The display control means includes a transfer means (function for executing the processing of step S1005 in the VDP 183) for transferring the drawing information created by the drawing information creation means to the display means,
The transfer means transfers the drawing information by transferring the information of one unit for a specific number, with the information for drawing the predetermined number of units of the unit pixel area as one unit. Regardless of whether control is performed by the special display control means or control by the non-special display control means, the information transfer unit and the specific number of the drawing information are set to be the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, wherein the gaming machine is configured to perform transfer.

  According to the feature C14, the drawing information is transferred in the same manner in any of the special display state and the non-special display state, so that the configuration related to the drawing information transfer can be shared. Therefore, in the configuration in which the attention degree to the game is improved as described above, it is possible to suppress the configuration related to the display control from becoming extremely complicated.

  It is preferable that the transfer unit is configured to transfer drawing information through the same transfer path. In this case, since the configuration related to the transfer of the drawing information is common in both the special display state and the non-special display state, the configuration related to the transfer can be simplified.

Feature C15. A drawing instruction unit (a function of outputting the drawing instruction information in the display CPU 182) for outputting drawing instruction information toward the drawing information creating unit;
The drawing information creation means executes creation processing for creating drawing information corresponding to the drawing instruction information based on the input of the drawing instruction information, and is controlled by the special display control means. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C14, wherein the same creation process is executed regardless of whether the control is performed by the non-special display control unit .

  According to the feature C15, since it is sufficient to perform the same creation process in any of the special display state and the non-special display state, it is possible to share the configuration related to the creation of the drawing information.

Feature C16. The display means includes
An image display unit (liquid crystal display unit 91) for displaying an image on the display surface;
Display execution means (image processing device 206) for executing image output processing for performing image output corresponding to the transferred drawing information on the image display unit;
With
The display execution means executes the same image output processing whether the control is performed by the special display control means or the non-special display control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C15, wherein:

  According to the feature C16, since the display means only needs to perform the same image output processing in either the special display state or the non-special display state, it is possible to share the configuration related to image output. Thereby, in the structure which aimed at the improvement of the attention degree to a game as mentioned above, it can suppress that the structure which concerns on the image output in a display means becomes extremely complicated.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature C group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display surface such as a liquid crystal display device and a display control device for controlling display of the display device are known. In such a gaming machine, a predetermined image is displayed on the display surface based on drawing data being created by the display control device and the created drawing data being transferred to the display device.

  Here, in gaming machines, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and as a method for improving the degree of attention, a method of diversifying or complicating the presentation mode by an image can be considered. However, it is not preferable that the configuration related to display control in the display control device is extremely complicated in order to improve the degree of attention.

  Note that the above problems are not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but also occur in other gaming machines equipped with a display device.

  Further, for any one of the features C1 to C16, the features A1 to A26, the features B1 to B15, the following features D1 to D20, the following features E1 to E11, the following features F1 to F13, and the following features G1 The configuration limited in any one of -G10 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 29) for displaying an image on a display surface (display surface 29a), and display control means (display control device 83) for controlling display of the display means,
The display control means
Drawing information creation means for creating drawing information used to display an image for a unit time (such as a function for executing the processes of steps S402, S502, and S503 in the VDP 183);
Transfer means for transferring the created drawing information (steps S405 and S408 in the VDP 183) so that an image for a unit time corresponding to the drawing information created by the drawing information creating means is displayed on the display surface. , The function of executing the processing of step S506 and step S509), and
With
In the gaming machine that displays the image on the display surface based on the transferred drawing information,
The display control means is a special display control means for making at least one of an area or a position in the display surface where an image can be viewed visually different from each other when the display surface is viewed from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine. The display CPU 182 has a function of executing the processing of step S204 to step S206) and non-special display control means (the function of executing the processing of step S208 to step S210 of the display CPU 182),
Whether the transfer means is controlled by the special display control means or is controlled by the non-special display control means, the image for unit time transferred to the display means The game machine is characterized in that the drawing information is transferred so that the drawing information corresponding to the item corresponds to the display of the image at the same position and area on the display surface.

  According to the feature D1, when the display surface is viewed from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine, a special display state and a non-special display state in which at least one of the area or the position in the display surface where the image can be visually recognized are different from each other. Since it is set, there are a plurality of patterns for viewing the image. This makes it possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

  In this case, in either the special display state or the non-special display state, the drawing information corresponding to the image for the unit time transferred to the display means is the image at the same position and area on the display surface. The display control means transfers the drawing information so as to correspond to the display. This makes it possible to share the configuration of the display means for displaying an image, as compared with the configuration in which drawing information corresponding to the display of images at different positions and areas is transferred. Therefore, in the configuration in which the degree of attention to the game is improved as described above, it is possible to suppress the configuration of the display unit for displaying an image from becoming extremely complicated.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the degree of attention to the game through the improvement of the degree of attention to display on the display means.

Feature D2. The display means includes a large number of unit pixel areas (unit pixel areas 95) arranged side by side, and drawing is performed on the unit pixel areas so that an image can be viewed through the display surface. Part (liquid crystal display part 91),
The transfer means transfers the drawing information by transferring a certain number of information of one unit with the information for causing a predetermined number of drawings of the unit pixel area to be drawn as one unit, Regardless of whether control is performed by the special display control means or control by the non-special display control means, the information transfer unit and the specific number of the drawing information are set to be the same. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to perform transfer.

  According to the feature D2, since the drawing information is transferred in the same manner in any of the special display state and the non-special display state, it is possible to share the configuration related to the transfer of the drawing information. Thus, it is possible to share the configuration of the display means for displaying an image.

Feature D3. The display means includes
An image display unit (liquid crystal display unit 91) that is configured by arranging a large number of unit pixel areas and allows the image to be viewed through the display surface by performing drawing on the unit pixel areas;
Display execution means (image processing device 206) for drawing the unit pixel area based on the drawing information transferred via the transfer path;
With
The transfer path includes a specific number of unit paths (drawing signal signal path SC1) corresponding to the number of predetermined combinations in the plurality of unit pixel regions,
When the information is transferred from any one of the unit paths, the display execution unit performs drawing based on the information on the unit pixel area corresponding to the transferred unit path.
The transfer means is the same for the multiple unit pixel areas and the unit path, regardless of whether the special display control means controls or the non-special display control means. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the drawing information is transferred with a correspondence relationship.

  According to the feature D3, since the drawing information is transferred in the same manner in both the special display state and the non-special display state, it is possible to make the configuration related to the transfer of the drawing information common. Thus, it is possible to share the configuration of the display means for displaying an image.

Feature D4. The display surface is configured by arranging a large number of unit pixel areas (unit pixel areas 95) and displaying an image by performing drawing on the unit pixel areas.
The display means is controlled so that the plurality of unit pixel areas are divided into a plurality of groups of image areas (upper display area 96, lower display area 97), and for each single unit pixel area. Alternatively, by arranging different groups of image areas for each of the plurality of unit pixel areas in a predetermined direction, the image areas of other groups are arranged between the image areas of the same group for the image areas of all groups. The configuration is controlled by
The drawing information creating means includes
First drawing information for creating drawing information of a first information capacity, which is drawing information corresponding to all of the plurality of groups of image areas, in the drawing information storage means when the special display control means performs control. Creating means (functions for executing the processing of step S502 and step S503 in VDP 183),
When the non-special display control means performs control, a second information capacity drawing information that is drawing information corresponding to a part of the plurality of groups of image areas is created in the drawing information storage means. Drawing information creation means (such as the function of executing the process of step S402 in VDP 183);
With
When the control is performed by the non-special display control unit, the transfer unit transfers all the drawing information of the second information capacity by a specific number, thereby using all the drawing information of the second information capacity. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the drawing information corresponding to the image area is transferred to the display means.

  According to the feature D4, in the display control means, the drawing information having the first information capacity is created as the drawing information corresponding to the image for the unit time according to the way the image is viewed. It is switched between when the information capacity drawing information is created. Thereby, when displaying a fine image or a complicated image, the drawing information of the first information capacity is created, and when such drawing information is not required, the drawing information of the second information capacity is created. Can be created. When the drawing information having the second information capacity is created, for example, a part of the drawing information storage means is an empty area compared to the case where the drawing information having the first information capacity is created. Thus, it is possible to effectively use the free space. In addition, for example, it is expected that there is room in processing time when drawing information corresponding to an image for a unit time is created, so that it is possible to display many characters using this.

  In addition, when an image is displayed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, the drawing information corresponding to all the image areas is displayed by transferring the drawing information of the second information capacity for a specific plurality. It is the structure made to be transferred to the means. As a result, even if the information capacity of the drawing information created as described above is switched as necessary, the configuration of the display means for displaying an image is prevented from becoming extremely complicated. . Furthermore, with the relatively simple configuration of transferring the drawing information of the second information capacity for a specific number, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  The image display unit is controlled so that a combination of unit pixel areas of each image area and a single unit pixel area arranged in a predetermined order repeatedly exists in a predetermined direction. The display executing means is configured to perform the same drawing in each unit pixel area that constitutes the same combination, thereby using all the image information using the drawing information of the second information capacity. The image may be displayed in the work area. In this case, since the image is displayed in all the image areas even when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, the image is displayed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity. The range in which the image is displayed in the display surface when the display is executed is the range in which the image is displayed in the display surface when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity. It is possible to make the player recognize that they are equivalent.

  In addition, “a part corresponding to a part” may be a predetermined divisor with respect to the number of the plurality of groups. In this case, when the transfer unit is controlled by the non-special display control unit, By transferring the drawing information of the second information capacity by a number obtained by dividing the number of the plurality of groups by the predetermined divisor, it corresponds to all the image areas using the drawing information of the second information capacity. The drawn information may be transferred to the display means. In the configuration, the number of unit pixel regions constituting the image area of each group may be the same.

  Feature D5. The transfer means transfers the drawing information of the second information capacity a plurality of times when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, and the drawing of the first information capacity. The game according to Feature D4, wherein when the display of the image is executed based on the information, the drawing information of the first information capacity is divided and transferred over the specific plurality of times. Machine.

  According to the feature D5, whether the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity or the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity, The transfer unit can be configured to perform the same processing. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the complexity of the processing of the transfer means.

  Further, with this configuration, the display unit can be configured to perform drawing in the same manner regardless of the display state. This makes it possible to share the configuration of the display means for performing drawing.

  Feature D6. The transfer means causes the display means to recognize the transfer information (first transfer signal, second transfer time) of the specific plurality of times that the drawing information for which transfer is being performed relates to the number of transfer times. The game machine according to Feature D5, wherein the game machine outputs a transfer signal.

  According to the feature D6, in the configuration in which the drawing information is transferred a plurality of times, the transfer information is transferred from the display control unit to the display unit, whereby the drawing information being transferred is displayed on the display unit. It is possible to uniquely recognize the number of transfer.

Feature D7. Display means (symbol display device 29) for displaying an image on a display surface (display surface 29a), and display control means (display control device 83) for controlling display of the display means,
The display control means
Drawing information creation means for creating drawing information used to display an image for a unit time (such as a function for executing the processes of steps S402, S502, and S503 in the VDP 183);
Transfer means for transferring the created drawing information (steps S405 and S408 in the VDP 183) so that an image for a unit time corresponding to the drawing information created by the drawing information creating means is displayed on the display surface. , The function of executing the processing of step S506 and step S509), and
With
In the gaming machine that displays the image on the display surface based on the transferred drawing information,
The display means can vary the type of image visually recognized according to the angle of viewing the display surface,
The display control means includes
Special display control means (a function for executing the processing of step S204 to step S206 in the display CPU 182) so as to be in a special display state in which the type of image visually recognized differs according to the viewing angle of the display surface;
Non-special display control means (a function for executing the processing from step S208 to step S210 in the display CPU 182) to be in a non-special display state in which different types of images are not viewed according to the viewing angle of the display surface. When,
With
In the transfer means, the drawing information corresponding to the image for a unit time transferred to the display means has the same position on the display surface and the non-special display state. A gaming machine that transfers drawing information so as to correspond to display of an image in an area.

  According to the feature D7, a special display state in which the types of images visually recognized according to the viewing angle on the display surface and a non-special display state in which different types of images are not visually recognized according to the viewing angle on the display surface As a result, there are a plurality of patterns for visually recognizing images. Thereby, the attention degree to a game can be improved.

  In this case, in either the special display state or the non-special display state, the drawing information corresponding to the image for the unit time transferred to the display means is the image at the same position and area on the display surface. The display control means transfers the drawing information so as to correspond to the display. This makes it possible to share the configuration of the display means for displaying an image, as compared with the configuration in which drawing information corresponding to the display of images at different positions and areas is transferred. Therefore, in the configuration in which the degree of attention to the game is improved as described above, it is possible to suppress the configuration of the display unit for displaying an image from becoming extremely complicated.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the degree of attention to the game through the improvement of the degree of attention to display on the display means.

Feature D8. The display means includes a large number of unit pixel areas (unit pixel areas 95) arranged side by side, and drawing is performed on the unit pixel areas so that an image can be viewed through the display surface. Part (liquid crystal display part 91),
The image display unit is controlled to have a plurality of first image areas (lower display areas 97) configured by a predetermined combination of the unit pixel areas, and is configured by a predetermined combination of the unit pixel areas. A plurality of second image areas (upper display areas 96) are controlled, the second image area is arranged between the first image areas, and the second image area is arranged between the second image areas. It is a configuration controlled so that a region for one image is arranged,
The display means defines a light emission direction from the display surface, thereby enabling an image displayed in the plurality of first image areas to be visually recognized from a first direction and the plurality of second images. A light defining means (parallax barrier panel 94) that enables the image displayed in the area to be viewed from the second direction,
The special display control means, as the special display state, allows the first image to be visually recognized from the whole of the plurality of first image areas and is different from the first image from the whole of the plurality of second image areas. So that the second type of image is visible.
The non-special display control means is configured so that an image is visually recognized from one of the plurality of first image areas and the plurality of second image areas as the non-special display state, or The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the same type of image is viewed without distinction between the plurality of first image areas and the plurality of second image areas.

  According to the feature D8, switching between the special display state and the non-special display state can be performed using the same image display unit.

  Feature D9. The transfer means transfers the drawing information by transferring a certain number of information of one unit with the information for causing a predetermined number of drawings of the unit pixel area to be drawn as one unit, In any one of the special display state and the non-special display state, the drawing information is transferred so that the information transfer unit and the specific number are the same. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D9, the display state does not become a special display state in which the type of the image visually recognized according to the angle at which the display surface is viewed and a state in which a different type of image is visually recognized according to the angle at which the display surface is viewed. A non-special display state can be set. In addition, in any of the special display state and the non-special display state, the drawing information is transferred in the same manner, so that the configuration related to the drawing information transfer can be shared, and the image It is possible to share the configuration of the display means for performing the display.

  In the feature D9, the image display unit includes a large number of unit pixel areas arranged vertically and horizontally, and the image display unit includes the first image region and the first image region in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The second image area may be controlled to be alternately arranged for each unit pixel area.

Feature D10. The display means includes display execution means (image processing device 206) that performs drawing on each unit pixel area based on drawing information transferred via a transfer path (signal path SC1 for drawing signals). And
The transfer path includes a specific number of unit paths corresponding to the number of predetermined combinations in the multiple unit pixel areas,
When the information is transferred from any one of the unit paths, the display execution unit performs drawing based on the information on the unit pixel area corresponding to the transferred unit path.
The transfer means transfers the drawing information with the same correspondence relationship between the plurality of unit pixel areas and the unit path in either the special display state or the non-special display state. The gaming machine according to Feature D8, wherein:

  According to the feature D10, since the drawing information is transferred in the same manner in any of the special display state and the non-special display state, the configuration related to the transfer of the drawing information can be made common. Thus, it is possible to share the configuration of the display means for displaying an image.

Feature D11. The drawing information creating means includes
When the special display state is set, a first information capacity drawing information that is drawing information corresponding to both the first image area and the second image area is created in a drawing information storage means. Drawing information creation means (function to execute the processing of step S502 and step S503 in VDP 183);
When in the non-special display state, drawing information having a second information capacity, which is drawing information corresponding to one of the first image area and the second image area, is created in the drawing information storage means. Second drawing information creation means (such as a function for executing the process of step S402 in the VDP 183);
With
In the non-special display state, the transfer means transfers the second information capacity drawing information by a specific number of times, thereby using the second information capacity drawing information and the first image area and The gaming machine according to any one of features D8 to D10, wherein drawing information corresponding to both of the second image areas is transferred to the display means.

  According to the feature D11, in the display control unit, the drawing information having the first information capacity is created as the drawing information corresponding to the image for the unit time according to the way the image is visually recognized. It is switched between when the information capacity drawing information is created. When the drawing information having the second information capacity is created, for example, a part of the drawing information storage means is an empty area compared to the case where the drawing information having the first information capacity is created. Thus, it is possible to effectively use the free space. In addition, for example, it is expected that there is room in processing time when drawing information corresponding to an image for a unit time is created, so that it is possible to display many characters using this.

  In addition, when an image is displayed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, the drawing information corresponding to all the image areas is displayed by transferring the drawing information of the second information capacity for a specific plurality. It is the structure made to be transferred to the means. As a result, even if the information capacity of the drawing information created as described above is switched as necessary, the configuration of the display means for displaying an image is prevented from becoming extremely complicated. . Furthermore, with the relatively simple configuration of transferring the drawing information of the second information capacity for a specific number, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Feature D12. The transfer means transfers the drawing information of the second information capacity a plurality of times when the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity, and the drawing of the first information capacity. The game according to Feature D11, wherein when the image display is executed based on the information, the drawing information of the first information capacity is divided and transferred over the specific plurality of times. Machine.

  According to the feature D12, whether the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the second information capacity or the image display is executed based on the drawing information of the first information capacity, The transfer unit can be configured to perform the same processing. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the complexity of the processing of the transfer means.

  Further, with this configuration, the display unit can be configured to perform drawing in the same manner regardless of the display state. This makes it possible to share the configuration of the display means for performing drawing.

  Feature D13. The transfer means causes the display means to recognize the transfer information (first transfer signal, second transfer time) of the specific plurality of times that the drawing information for which transfer is being performed relates to the number of transfer times. The game machine according to Feature D12, wherein the game machine outputs a transfer signal.

  According to the feature D13, in the configuration in which the drawing information is transferred a plurality of times, the transfer information is transferred from the display control unit to the display unit, whereby the drawing information being transferred is displayed on the display unit. It is possible to uniquely recognize the number of transfer.

Feature D14. The display means identifies which of the image areas the drawing information transferred via the transfer path corresponds to, and based on the drawing information corresponding to the first image area, Display execution means (image processing device 206) for displaying an image in the one image area and displaying the image in the second image area based on the drawing information corresponding to the second image area;
The transfer means transfers the drawing information corresponding to the first image area and the drawing information corresponding to the second image area in either the special display state or the non-special display state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D8 to D10, wherein the gaming machine is transferred to the display unit via a route.

  According to the feature D14, in either the special display state or the non-special display state, the display unit identifies which image area corresponds to the transferred transfer information, and the identification result The drawing corresponding to is performed. This makes it possible to share the configuration of the display means for performing drawing.

Feature D15. The transfer path includes a number of unit paths corresponding to the image areas,
When the information is transferred from any one of the unit paths, the display execution unit performs the drawing based on the information on the image area corresponding to the transferred unit path, so that the drawing An image corresponding to information is displayed on the display surface,
The game according to Feature D14, wherein the transfer means transfers the drawing information using the unit paths in either the special display state or the non-special display state. Machine.

  According to the feature D15, in any of the special display state and the non-special display state, the display unit outputs the image output corresponding to the information transferred from each unit path to the image area corresponding to the unit path. You can do this. Therefore, in the configuration in which the degree of attention to the game is improved as described above, the configuration of the display means for performing drawing can be shared.

Feature D16. The display means is capable of differentiating an image when the display surface is viewed from a first direction and an image when the display surface is viewed from a second direction,
A reflection means (mirror unit 141) having a reflection surface (reflection surfaces 142a, 143a) for reflecting an image on the display surface;
The special display control means can be visually recognized from the first direction by reflecting an image visible from the second direction on the display surface as the special display state. Both an image that is visible from the first direction on the display surface and an image that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected by the reflective surface are from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine. So that it becomes visible.
In any one of the features D7 to D14, the non-special display control unit is configured to make a state in which no reflection of an image is performed on the reflecting surface as the non-special display state. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D16, in the special display state, unlike the non-special display state, it is possible to display different images on the display surface and the reflection surface. As a result, in the special display state, compared to the non-special display state, the area where the image is displayed can be enlarged while using the same display surface, so that the image display is performed in the special display state and the non-special display state. There will be a clear difference in the way they are played, and it will be possible to improve the degree of attention to the game by switching between these states.

Feature D17. A window panel (transparent panel 168) is provided on the display surface in front of the gaming machine,
In the special display state, both the image that is visible from the first direction on the display surface and the image that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected by the reflective surface are both The display surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel so that the display surface can be viewed from the predetermined position through the window panel, and the direction of the display surface is the direction of the reflective surface Intersects with
The gaming machine according to Feature D16, wherein in the non-special display state, the display surface is parallel or substantially parallel to the window panel.

  According to the feature D17, in the special display state, the display surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, so that a space for providing an image display area can be provided in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or the game The area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the machine, and even if the space for providing the area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, Compared with a configuration in which the area is expanded in the left-right direction, the area can be enlarged while suppressing expansion of the space for providing the area in each direction.

  In addition, when an image is displayed on each of the display surface and the reflection surface, the direction in which the display surface faces is a direction intersecting the direction in which the reflection surface faces. Compared to the configuration in which the display means having the display surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, the size in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine can be reduced in order to expand the area where the image is displayed.

  Furthermore, in the non-special display state, the display surface is parallel or substantially parallel to the window panel, so that the orientation of the display surface is changed between the special display state and the non-special display state. The difference is clear. Moreover, according to this structure, it becomes possible to improve the visibility of the display surface in a non-special display state.

  Feature D18. The special display control means is configured to perform drawing on the second image area so that the second image is displayed on the display surface in a state where the second image is reversed in a direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged. The gaming machine according to Feature D16 or D17, wherein there is a game machine.

  The second image displayed on the display surface is reflected by the reflection surface, and is inverted in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged. On the other hand, according to the feature D18, since the image output for the second image area is performed in a state where the second image is inverted in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged, the image displayed on the reflection surface is Originally, a state that should be visually recognized by the player is obtained.

  Feature D19. The transfer means transfers drawing information corresponding to a state in which images displayed in the second image area are reversed in the arrangement direction to the display means in the special display state. The gaming machine described in Feature D18.

  According to the feature D19, the drawing information corresponding to the state in which the image displayed in the second image area is inverted is created by the display control means, and the created drawing information is transferred to the display means. As a result, the display means does not need to execute a special process for inverting the image displayed in the second image area, and performs the drawing corresponding to the transferred drawing information. The image displayed in the area is naturally reversed. Therefore, it is possible to share the configuration of the display means for displaying an image.

Feature D20. A drawing instruction unit (a function of outputting the drawing instruction information in the display CPU 182) for supplying drawing instruction information to the drawing information creating unit;
The drawing information creating means executes a creation process for creating drawing information corresponding to the drawing instruction information based on receiving the drawing instruction information;
The drawing instruction means supplies drawing instruction information so as to create drawing information corresponding to a state in which the image displayed in the second image area is inverted in the arrangement direction in the special display state. The gaming machine according to Feature D18 or D19, wherein

  According to the feature D20, when creating the drawing information in the special display state, the image displayed in the second image area corresponds to the state in which the display surface and the reflecting surface are reversed in accordance with the drawing instruction information. Drawn drawing information is created. As a result, if the types of drawing instruction information supplied in the special display state and the non-special display state are different, images corresponding to each state can be displayed. There is no need to separately provide a dedicated process corresponding to information. Therefore, it is possible to share a configuration related to creation of drawing information.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature group D is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display surface such as a liquid crystal display device and a display control device for controlling display of the display device are known. In such a gaming machine, drawing data is created by the display control device and the created drawing data is transferred to the display device. An image processing device is provided in the display device, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display surface by performing image output corresponding to the transferred drawing data in the image processing device.

  Here, in gaming machines, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and as a method for improving the degree of attention, a method of diversifying or complicating the presentation mode by an image can be considered. However, it is not preferable that the configuration related to image output in the display device is extremely complicated in order to improve the degree of attention.

  Note that the above problems are not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but also occur in other gaming machines equipped with a display device.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features D1 to D20, the features A1 to A26, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C16, the following features E1 to E11, the following features F1 to F13, and the following features G1. The configuration limited in any one of -G10 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. In a gaming machine provided with movable means (mirror unit 141, shutter 151) driven and operated by movable drive means (common drive motor 161),
The movable means includes a first movable part (shutter 151) and a second movable part (mirror unit 141) provided in an energized state,
When the movable drive means is in the first drive state, the first movable portion moves in a direction against the urging force and moves in the direction in which the second movable portion is urged. When the driving means is in the second drive state, the first movable part moves in the direction in which the first movable part is biased and the second movable part moves in a direction against the biasing force. A gaming machine comprising transmission means (common gears 162 to 164) for applying a driving force of the movable drive means to both the movable part and the second movable part.

  According to the feature E1, when the first movable part moves in a direction against the urging force, the first movable part moves in the direction in which the second movable part is urged, thereby causing the first in the direction against the urging force. The urging force to the second movable part contributes to the power required for the movement of the movable part, so that the driving force of the movable drive means necessary for the movement can be reduced. On the other hand, when the second movable part moves in the direction against the urging force, the second movable part moves in the direction against the urging force by moving in the direction in which the first movable part is urged. The urging force to the first movable part contributes to the power required for. Thus, the driving force required to move the first movable part in the direction against the urging force in the movable driving means and the second driving part required to move in the direction against the urging force in the movable driving means. The driving force can be reduced.

  In addition, since the urging force of one of the first movable part and the second movable part is used as power for moving the other in the direction against the urging force, there is no need to extremely reduce the size of the movable part. The operability of the movable part is not extremely lowered.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the configuration of the movable means that operates by being driven by the driving means.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the first movable part and the second movable part are provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction and biased downward by their own weight.

  According to the feature E2, the weight load of the first movable part acts in a direction to cancel the weight load of the second movable part, and the weight load of the second movable part in a direction to cancel the weight load of the first movable part. Will act. Thereby, reduction of the driving force required in the drive means for a movement is achieved, utilizing the weight load of a 1st movable part and a 2nd movable part.

  Feature E3. The movable drive means and the transmission means have a weight load of the first movable portion applied to the output portion (output shaft 161a) of the movable drive means and a weight load of the second movable portion applied to the output portion. The gaming machine according to Feature E2, wherein the gaming machine is provided to be equal or substantially equal.

  According to the feature E3, the weight load of the first movable part and the weight load of the second movable part are canceled each other, and the driving force necessary for the movable drive means can be reduced.

Feature E4. The first movable part has a first visual recognition area (a surface of the shutter part 152) that can be visually recognized by a player in a state where the first movable part is disposed at least at a predetermined position, and the second movable part is at least predetermined. Having a second viewing area (reflecting surfaces 142a, 143a) that is visible to the player in the state of being placed at the position of
Further, the movable drive control for driving and controlling the movable drive means so that the position of the first visual recognition area and the position of the second visual recognition area are changed in conjunction with an effect executed by the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, further comprising means (a function for executing the processing of step S206 and step S210 in the display CPU 182).

  According to the feature E4, it is possible to make the player visually recognize how a plurality of objects are moving simultaneously in conjunction with the performance. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature E1, it is possible to enhance the visual effect while reducing the driving force necessary for the movable driving means.

Feature E5. The movable drive means and the transmission means are provided in a drive region (support base 131),
Each of the movable parts and the drive area is one of a part where the first visual recognition area is formed in the first movable part and a part where the second visual recognition area is formed in the second movable part. It is arranged so as to move in the space between the other and the driving area, the driving area is on the side far from the player's viewpoint, and the other part is on the side near the player's viewpoint. The gaming machine according to Feature E4, wherein the gaming machine is arranged.

  According to the feature E5, the first viewing area and the second viewing area are arranged closer to the player's viewpoint than the driving area while increasing the size of the first viewing area and the second viewing area. It becomes possible.

  Feature E6. Of the first movable part and the second movable part, the receiving part (shutter retaining member 156) that receives the driving force in the movable part including the other part sandwiches the movable part including the one part therebetween. The gaming machine according to Feature E5, wherein the gaming machine is provided in such a manner.

  According to the feature E6, while the transmission of power to each movable part is performed satisfactorily, the movable part closer to the receiving part of the movable part far from the drive region among the first movable part and the second movable part. Interference with the part can be avoided.

Feature E7. A single one-side receiving part (mirror movable plate 146) is provided as a receiving part of the movable part including the one part, and the one-side receiving part is provided as a receiving part of the movable part including the other part. A pair of other side receiving portions (shutter retaining members 156) disposed so as to sandwich the portion,
The transmission means includes a plurality of gears (common gears 162 to 164),
The plurality of gears form a pair of gear trains that continue from the one side receiving part toward each other side receiving part,
The one side receiving portion is formed with a rack region in which a large number of teeth are arranged in parallel in the moving direction of the movable portion including the one portion, corresponding to each gear train,
Each of the other side receiving portions has a rack region in which a large number of teeth are arranged in parallel in the moving direction of the movable portion including the other portion, corresponding to the corresponding gear train,
The movable drive means includes an output portion (output shaft 161a) that is rotatable in a predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction and is connected to any one of the gears. Game machines.

  According to the feature E7, in the configuration including the feature E5, the driving force of the movable drive unit can be transmitted to both the first movable portion and the second movable portion.

Feature E8. A visual recognition area forming portion (game board 23) for forming a visual recognition area visible to the player through a window panel (window panel 54) provided on the front portion of the gaming machine;
While having a display area (display surface 29a) for performing a predetermined display, the display area is exposed to the window panel side through an opening (opening 35) formed in the viewing area forming portion. Display means (symbol display device 29) arranged as described above,
With
The first movable portion is a shutter (shutter 151) that closes a predetermined space between the periphery of the display area and the periphery of the opening so as not to be exposed to the window panel side through the opening.
When the second movable part is disposed at a retracted position moved from the closed position where the shutter is closed so as not to expose the predetermined space to the outside of the periphery of the opening, the second movable part is located with respect to the predetermined space. The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E7, wherein the gaming machine is a production (mirror unit 141) arranged.

  According to the feature E8, since the effect by the effect is performed using the predetermined space that has been blocked by the shutter until then, the effect by the effect is close to the display region while suppressing overlap with the display region. Can be done in position. In addition, when the effect by the effect is not performed, the predetermined space is not exposed but is blocked by the shutter, which is visually preferable.

  By providing the configuration of the feature E1 in the above configuration, it is only necessary to provide a common movable drive unit for the shutter and the effect, and furthermore, to move the shutter and the effect in the movable drive unit. The required driving force can be reduced.

Feature E9. The display means is provided so as to be displaceable, and the displacement range of the display means includes a first position and a relative distance of at least a portion of the predetermined space side with respect to the window panel in the display area. And a second position farther away,
The movable drive control means is disposed at a retracted position where the shutter is disposed at the closed position and the effect is not visible through the window panel when the display means is disposed at the first position. The movable drive means is controlled so that the shutter is located at the retracted position and the effect is located relative to the predetermined space when the display means is located at the second position. As described above, the game machine according to Feature E8, wherein the movable drive means is driven and controlled.

  According to the feature E9, since the display unit itself is displaced, the impact of the production is enhanced. In addition, in the display area, at least when the display means is displaced to a position where the distance between the portion on the predetermined space side and the window panel is far away, the effect is produced by the effect material. A large space for arranging objects is secured. Furthermore, since the shutter is provided, the predetermined space is not exposed in the situation where the display means is disposed at the first position, which is visually preferable. For example, in a situation where the display means is arranged at the first position, a configuration in which the size of the display area is set so that no gap is generated between the opening and the display area is conceivable. Although it is necessary to enlarge the area, the display means may not be displaced favorably. However, the provision of the shutter suppresses the occurrence of such inconvenience.

  By providing the configuration of the feature E1 in the above configuration, it is only necessary to provide a common movable drive unit for the shutter and the effect, and furthermore, to move the shutter and the effect in the movable drive unit. The required driving force can be reduced.

Feature E10. The display means is capable of differentiating an image when the display area is viewed from a first direction and an image when the display area is viewed from a second direction,
The effect has a reflecting surface (reflecting surfaces 142a, 143a) that reflects an image in the display area,
In a state where the shutter is disposed at the retracted position and the effect is disposed with respect to the predetermined space, an image that is visible from the second direction in the display area is reflected by the reflective surface. In the display area, the image can be visually recognized from the first direction, and the display area can be visually recognized from the second direction. The gaming machine according to feature E8 or E9, wherein both the reflected image and the reflected image are visible through the window panel from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature E10, in a state where the shutter is disposed at the retracted position and the effect is disposed with respect to the predetermined space, it is possible to display different images in each of the display area and the reflection surface. . Thereby, the enlargement of the area | region where an image is displayed using the same display area is achieved. On the other hand, in a situation where the shutter is disposed at the closed position, the image cannot be viewed through the reflecting surface. Therefore, since the size of the area where the image is displayed can be changed through the movement of the shutter and the effect, there is a clear difference in how the image is displayed in each state. Through this, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E11. The display means is provided so as to be displaceable, and a displacement range of the display means includes a non-special display position where the display area is parallel or substantially parallel to the window panel, and the display area is located on the window panel. In contrast, a special display position inclined to the back of the gaming machine is included,
The movable drive control means is disposed at a retracted position where the shutter is disposed at the closed position and the effect is not visible through the window panel when the display means is disposed at the non-special display position. The movable drive means is driven and controlled, and when the display means is located at the special display position, the shutter is located at the retracted position, and the effect is relative to the predetermined space. The gaming machine according to Feature E10, wherein the movable driving means is controlled to be disposed.

  According to the feature E11, in the special display position, the display area is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, so that a space for providing an area for displaying an image can be provided in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the game The area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the machine, and even if the space for providing the area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, Compared with a configuration in which the area is expanded in the left-right direction, the area can be enlarged while suppressing expansion of the space for providing the area in each direction.

  In addition, when an image is displayed in each of the display area and the reflective surface, the direction in which the display area faces is a direction that intersects the direction in which the reflective surface faces. Compared to the configuration in which the display means having the display area is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine can be reduced in order to expand the area where the image is displayed.

  In addition, at the non-special display position, the display area is parallel or substantially parallel to the window panel, so that the orientation of the display area is changed between the special display position and the non-special display position. Is clear. Moreover, according to this structure, it becomes possible to improve the visibility of the display area in a non-special display position.

  In addition, in the situation where the display means is arranged at the first position, a configuration in which the size of the display area is set so that no gap is generated between the opening and the display area is conceivable. Although it is necessary to enlarge the area, the display means may not be displaced favorably. However, the provision of the shutter suppresses the occurrence of such inconvenience.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature group E is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a movable member that is driven and operated by a driving device such as a solenoid or a rotary motor are known.

  For example, a movable member is provided around the liquid crystal display device and the like, and the movable member is operated by being driven by a driving device in accordance with the game content (for example, the content of the display of the variation of the design). It is designed to enhance the fun of games during times of change. In addition to the above configuration, the movable member that is driven and operated by the driving device is configured to prevent or allow the passage of the game medium in the predetermined game medium passage, or the predetermined part is a gaming machine. There is known a configuration provided for switching between a state in which the user can visually recognize from the front and a state in which the user cannot visually recognize.

  Here, in order to improve the configuration of the gaming machine, it is preferable to reduce the driving force and the size of the driving device. However, it is not preferable that the size of the movable member needs to be extremely reduced or the operability of the movable member is extremely lowered in order to reduce the driving force and the size.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features E1 to E11, the features A1 to A26, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D20, the following features F1 to F13, and the following features G1. The configuration limited in any one of -G10 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 29) for performing a predetermined display in the display area (display surface 29a);
Movable means (mirror unit 141, shutter 151) that are displaceable according to the effect on the display means and are visible from the front of the gaming machine around the display area in a state of being arranged at least at a specific position;
Display drive means (display drive motor 121) for displacing the display means;
Movable drive means (common drive motor 161) for displacing the movable means so as to be arranged at a position corresponding to the position of the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F1, not only the display means and the movable means are provided, but also the display means can be displaced. Accordingly, it is possible to perform not only an effect of performing a predetermined display on the display means and an effect of operating the movable means, but also an effect of displacing the display means itself. Therefore, diversification of production is achieved, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In the above configuration, the driving means for displacing the display means and the driving means for displacing the movable means are provided separately. As a result, it is possible to displace each of them individually, for example, while suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which display on the display means is not performed favorably or a situation in which the function of the movable means is not performed satisfactorily, and It is possible to achieve the effect.

  As described above, it is possible to favorably provide an unexpected performance.

  Feature F2. Movable vibration control means for driving and controlling the movable drive means so that the movable means vibrates (the function of executing step S110 in the display CPU 182 of the first embodiment, in the display CPU 182 of the fifth embodiment. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S1310.

  According to the feature F2, the movable means can be vibrated as an effect, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. In this case, since the driving means for displacing the display means and the driving means for displacing the movable means are provided separately, the display means does not vibrate when the movable means is vibrated. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the influence when the movable means is vibrated from reaching the display means.

Feature F3. Display vibration control means (function to execute the process of step S105 in the display CPU 182) for driving and controlling the display drive means so that the display means vibrates,
The period in which the display unit is controlled to vibrate by the display vibration control unit and the period in which the movable unit is controlled to vibrate by the movable vibration control unit are configured not to overlap. The gaming machine according to Feature F2, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature F3, not only an effect of vibrating the movable means but also an effect of vibrating the display means can be performed, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. In this case, drive control is performed so that the period during which the display means vibrates and the period during which the movable means vibrate do not overlap. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while avoiding the occurrence of inconvenience due to the simultaneous vibration of a plurality of objects.

  Feature F4. It is provided with a display control means for vibration (function to execute the process of step S1311 in the display CPU 182) for controlling the display means so as to perform display so that the picture vibrates in the display area. A gaming machine according to feature F2 or F3.

  According to the feature F4, even if the display means itself is not vibrated, a display is made as if the pattern is vibrating in the display area. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game while avoiding the failure of the display means by vibrating the display means itself.

  Feature F5. In the situation where the movable drive means is driven and controlled by the movable vibration control means so that the movable means vibrates, the display control means for vibration is displayed in the display area where the picture is vibrating. The gaming machine according to Feature F4, wherein the display means is controlled to be displayed.

  According to the feature F5, in the situation where the movable means is vibrating, the display area is displayed as if the pattern is vibrating, so that it is possible to perform an integrated vibration effect on both. It becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. In addition, the display means itself is not vibrated, but the display area is displayed as if the pattern is vibrating. It becomes possible to play.

  Feature F6. Display displacement drive control means for driving and controlling the display drive means so as to change the orientation of the display area (function for executing the processing of step S205 and step S209 in the display CPU 182 of the first embodiment, fifth The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, including a function of executing the processing of step S1305 and step S1316 in display CPU 182 of the embodiment.

  According to the feature F6, when the direction of the display area is changed, a distinct difference in appearance occurs when the display unit is displaced. Thereby, when the display means is displaced, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display area, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature F7. The movable displacement drive control means (steps S206 and S210 in the display CPU 182 of the first embodiment) that drives and controls the movable drive means so that the movable means is arranged at a position corresponding to the orientation of the display area. And a function for executing the processes of steps S1306 and S1317 in the display CPU 182 of the fifth embodiment).

  According to the feature F7, in the configuration in which the orientation of the display area is changed, the movable means is displaced to a position corresponding to the orientation of the display area. Therefore, the effect by changing the orientation of the display area and the effect by the displacement of the movable means Can be provided to the player as an integral unit.

Feature F8. A visual recognition area forming portion (game board 23) for forming a visual recognition area visible to the player through a window panel (window panel 54) provided on the front portion of the gaming machine;
The display means is arranged so that the display area is exposed to the window panel side through an opening (opening 35) formed in the visual recognition area forming section,
The movable means includes a shutter (shutter 151) that blocks a predetermined space between the periphery of the display area and the periphery of the opening so as not to be exposed to the window panel side through the opening.
The movable displacement drive control means sets the shutter to the closed position so that the predetermined space is not exposed to the window panel side in a situation where the display means is arranged so that the display area faces a specific direction. And in a situation where the display means is arranged so that the display area faces a predetermined direction different from the specific direction, the shutter is displaced from the closed position to the outside of the opening. The gaming machine according to Feature F7, wherein the gaming machine is arranged.

  According to the feature F8, when the orientation of the display area is changed, even if a predetermined gap is generated between the peripheral edge of the display area and the peripheral edge of the opening due to the provision of the shutter, the feature F8 is blocked. Is possible, which is preferable in appearance. In this case, the configuration of the feature F1 is provided, and the driving means for displacing the display means and the driving means for displacing the shutter are separately provided, so that the orientation of the display area and the position of the shutter are individually changed. It is possible to perform each operation satisfactorily.

  Further, in the configuration provided with the feature F2, the display means can be prevented from vibrating when the effect of vibrating the shutter is executed, thereby making the overlapping area of the shutter and the display area extremely wide. Even if it is not ensured, it is possible to suppress the exposure of the gap between the shutter and the display area when the shutter is vibrated. Further, in the configuration including the feature F3, when an effect of vibrating one of the shutter and the display unit is executed, it is possible to prevent the other from vibrating, thereby overlapping the shutter and the display area. Even if it is not ensured extremely wide, it is possible to suppress the exposure of the gap between the shutter and the display area when one is vibrated.

  Feature F9. The game according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein the movable means includes an effect (mirror unit 141) that allows a player to visually recognize a predetermined image according to the display in the display area. Machine.

  According to the feature F9, in the effect, an effect of causing the player to visually recognize a predetermined image according to the display in the display area is performed, so that the degree of attention to the effect is increased, and accordingly, the degree of attention to the game Can be increased.

Feature F10. The display means is capable of differentiating an image when the display area is viewed from a first direction and an image when the display area is viewed from a second direction,
The movable means includes an effect (mirror unit 141) having a reflecting surface (reflecting surfaces 142a, 143a) for reflecting an image in the display area,
In the relative position of the display means and the effect,
An image that is visible from the second direction in the display area is reflected from the reflection surface and is visible from the first direction, and further, an image that is visible from the first direction in the display area. And a position for special display in which both the image that is visible from the second direction in the display area and that is reflected by the reflecting surface are visible from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine,
A position for non-special display where the reflection of the image on the reflecting surface is not performed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein:

  According to the feature F10, in a situation where the relative position between the display unit and the effect is the position for special display, it is possible to display different images in each of the display area and the reflection surface. Thereby, the enlargement of the area | region where an image is displayed using the same display area is achieved. On the other hand, in a situation where the relative position of the display means and the effect is a non-special display position, the image cannot be viewed through the reflecting surface. Therefore, since it is possible to change the size of the area where the image is displayed, there is a clear difference in how the image is displayed in each state, and the attention to the game is improved through switching between these states Can be achieved.

  Further, in the configuration provided with the feature F2, it is possible to prevent the display means from vibrating when performing an effect of vibrating the effect, and thereby, due to vibration compared to a configuration in which both are vibrated simultaneously. It is possible to prevent the reflection of the image on the reflection surface from being performed satisfactorily during the performance. Further, in the configuration provided with the feature F3, it is possible to prevent the other from vibrating when performing an effect in which one of the effects or the display means is vibrated. Thus, it is possible to prevent the reflection of the image on the reflecting surface from being satisfactorily performed during the production of vibration.

  Further, in the configuration including the feature F4 and the feature F5, it is possible to display as if the picture is vibrating in the display area while vibrating the effect without vibrating the display means itself. Thus, it is possible to perform an integrated vibration effect on both while avoiding failure of the display means.

Feature F11. In the non-special display position, the display means is disposed at a position in which the window panel provided on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the display area and the display area are parallel or substantially parallel, and the special display position. Then, the display area is arranged at a position inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel,
In the non-special display position, the effect is arranged at a position where it cannot be visually recognized from the predetermined position through the window panel. In the special display position, the direction in which the reflecting surface faces is the display area. The game according to Feature F10, wherein the reflecting surface is disposed at a position where the reflecting surface is visible from the predetermined position through the window panel in a state intersecting with the direction toward Machine.

  According to the feature F11, since the display area is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel at the special display position, the space for providing the area where the image is displayed is provided in the vertical direction of the gaming machine. The area can be enlarged without being expanded in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the area is expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, Compared to a configuration in which the space is expanded in the vertical direction and the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the space can be enlarged while suppressing expansion of the space for providing the region in each direction.

  In addition, when an image is displayed in each of the display area and the reflective surface, the direction in which the display area faces is a direction that intersects the direction in which the reflective surface faces. Compared to the configuration in which the display means having the display area is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine can be reduced in order to expand the area where the image is displayed.

  In addition, since the display area is parallel or substantially parallel to the window panel at the non-special display position, the orientation of the display area is changed between the special display position and the non-special display position. Differences in configuration between positions will be clear. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to improve the visibility of the display area at the position for non-special display.

Feature F12. A visual recognition area forming portion (game board 23) for forming a visual recognition area visible to the player through a window panel (window panel 54) provided on the front portion of the gaming machine;
While having a display area (display surface 29a) for performing a predetermined display, the display area is exposed to the window panel side through an opening (opening 35) formed in the viewing area forming portion. Display means (symbol display device 29) arranged as described above,
Display drive means (display drive motor 121) for displacing the display means so that the orientation of the display area is changed;
In a situation where the display means is arranged so that the display area faces a specific direction, a predetermined space between the peripheral edge of the display area and the peripheral edge of the opening is on the window panel side through the opening. A shutter (shutter 151) that is closed so as not to be exposed;
Movable drive means (common drive motor 161) for displacing the shutter;
A display vibration control means (function for executing the processing of step S105 in the display CPU 182) for driving and controlling the display drive means so that the display means vibrates;
Movable drive control means (function to execute the processing of step S110 in the display CPU 182 of the first embodiment) for driving and controlling the movable drive means so that the shutter vibrates;
With
A period in which the display means is controlled to vibrate by the display vibration control means and a period in which the shutter is vibrated by the movable vibration control means are configured not to overlap. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature F12, when the direction of the display area is changed, a distinct difference in appearance occurs when the display unit is displaced. Thereby, when the display means is displaced, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display area, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. In addition, since the shutter is provided, even when a predetermined gap is generated between the periphery of the display region and the periphery of the opening when the orientation of the display region is changed, it can be blocked. It is preferable in appearance.

  In addition, the shutter can be vibrated as an effect, and the display means can be vibrated as an effect, which increases the degree of attention to the game. In this case, since the drive control is performed so that the period during which the display unit vibrates and the period during which the shutter vibrates do not overlap, when the effect of vibrating one of the shutter or the display unit is executed, the other This makes it possible to prevent vibration, so that the gap between the shutter and the display area is exposed when one of them is vibrated, even if the overlap area between the shutter and the display area is not extremely large. Can be suppressed.

Feature F13. Display means (symbol display device 29) for performing a predetermined display in the display area (display surface 29a);
Display drive means (display drive motor 121) for displacing the display means so that the orientation of the display area is changed;
An effect (mirror unit 141) that causes the player to visually recognize a predetermined image according to the display in the display area;
Movable drive means (common drive motor 161) for displacing the effect,
Movable vibration control means (function for executing the processing of step S1310 in the display CPU 182 of the fifth embodiment) for driving and controlling the movable drive means so that the effect product vibrates;
Display control means for vibration (function to execute the process of step S1311 in the display CPU 182) for controlling the display means to perform display so that the pattern vibrates in the display area;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F13, when the direction of the display area is changed, a clear difference occurs when the display unit is displaced. Thereby, when the display means is displaced, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display area, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. In addition, in the production, an effect that causes the player to visually recognize a predetermined image according to the display in the display area is performed, so that the degree of attention to the production is increased, and accordingly, the degree of attention to the game can be increased. It becomes possible.

  In addition, since the effect can be vibrated as an effect, the degree of attention to the game is increased. In this case, the display means displays as if the pattern is vibrating in the display area without vibrating the display means itself. Thereby, it is possible to perform an integrated vibration effect on both while avoiding a failure of the display means through vibrating the display means itself, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Each invention of the said characteristic F group is effective with respect to the following subjects.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display surface such as a liquid crystal display device are known. There is also known a movable member that is provided around the display device so that the movable member operates in accordance with the game content (for example, the content of the symbol change display).

  Here, in a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and as a method for improving the degree of attention, a method of adding unexpectedness to the production is conceivable. However, it is not preferable that a situation in which display on the display device is not performed satisfactorily or a situation in which the function of the movable member is not performed satisfactorily occurs when the unexpectedness is imparted.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features F1 to F13, the features A1 to A26, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D20, the features E1 to E11, the following feature G1 The configuration limited in any one of -G10 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Display means having a display surface (display surface 29a) and capable of differentiating the display when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and the display when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. (Design display device 29);
Reflecting means (mirror unit 141) having a reflecting surface (reflecting surfaces 142a, 143a) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
In the display surface, the display surface visible from the second direction is reflected by the reflection surface so that the display surface is visible from the first direction. The directions facing each other are crossed, and further, a display that is visible from the first direction on the display surface and a display that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected by the reflective surface The display means and the reflection means are placed at a special display position where at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine so that both can be viewed from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine. Holding means (torsion coil spring 116, display drive motor 121, common drive motor 161) for holding;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, the display unit and the reflection unit are held at the special display position by the holding unit, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the space for providing the display area is the vertical direction of the gaming machine, The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply increased. Compared to the configuration in which the gaming machine is expanded in the vertical direction and the gaming machine in the horizontal direction, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each of the above directions.

  Further, the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the direction in which the reflecting surface faces intersects with the direction in which the display face faces, and thus the display means having the same display surface as the display area. Compared to the configuration in which the game machine is tilted in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine, the size of the space for providing the display area in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Note that the “holding” by the “holding means” is not limited as long as the display means and the reflecting means are held at the special display position, and both the display means and the reflecting means are kept in a state where no displacement occurs due to the external force. In addition to the above-described configuration, a configuration in which at least one of the display unit and the reflection unit is maintained in a state in which displacement with respect to an external force can occur is included. The same applies to the following.

  Feature G2. The special display position is such that both the display surface and the reflective surface are positioned so that the sides close to each other in the display surface and the reflective surface are located on the rear side of the gaming machine and the sides far from each other are located on the front side of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the gaming machine is a position that is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature G2, in the special display position held by the holding means, both the display surface and the reflection surface are inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area, The display area can be increased in size favorably. That is, when the size of the space for providing the display area is the same, both the display surface and the reflective surface are compared with the configuration in which only one of the display surface and the reflective surface is tilted in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. By tilting the game machine in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine, it is possible to secure a large total area of the display surface and the reflection surface.

Feature G3. The display surface and the reflection surface are both formed in a planar shape,
The gaming machine according to claim G1 or G2, wherein the special display position is a position where an angle of the reflection surface with respect to the display surface is a right angle or a substantially right angle.

  According to the feature G3, the angle of the reflection surface with respect to the display surface is a right angle or a substantially right angle at the special display position held by the holding means. The display displayed on the reflection surface is visually recognized as being displayed on the same plane as the display surface. Thereby, the display in a display area can be performed favorably so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

Feature G4. The display means includes an image display unit (liquid crystal display unit 91) for displaying an image on the display surface,
In the image display section, a plurality of first image areas (lower display area 97) and a plurality of second image areas (upper display area 96) are set, and a second image area is set between the first image areas. And a display control means (display control device 83) capable of controlling the display of the image display unit so that the first image region is disposed between the second image regions.
Furthermore, the display means defines a light emission direction from the display surface, thereby enabling the first image displayed in the plurality of first image areas to be visually recognized from the first direction. Any of the characteristics G1 to G3, further comprising: a light defining means (parallax barrier panel 94) that allows the second image displayed in the plurality of second image areas to be visually recognized from the second direction. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature G4, an image when the display surface is viewed from the first direction can be different from an image when the display surface is viewed from the second direction.

  Feature G5. The display control means sets image information for the second image area so that the second image is displayed in the state where the second image is inverted in a direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged on the display surface. The gaming machine according to Feature G4, further comprising a reversing control means (such as a function of executing the process of Step S502 in the VDP 183).

  The second image displayed on the display surface is reflected by the reflection surface, and is inverted in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged. On the other hand, according to the feature G5, since the setting of the image information for the second image area is performed in a state where the second image is reversed in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged, it is reflected on the reflection surface. Originally, the displayed image is in a state to be visually recognized by the player.

Feature G6. The holding means includes position changing means (display driving motor 121, common driving motor 161) for changing the positions of the display surface and the reflecting surface. A display position is included, and both the image displayed in the first image area and the image displayed in the second image area when viewed from the predetermined position are collectively displayed on the display surface. Non-special display positions that can be visually recognized and no reflection of the image on the reflecting surface are included, and the display means and the reflection means can be held at each of these special display positions and non-special display positions. And
When the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position, the second image is inverted in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are aligned on the display surface. The image information for the second image area is set so that it is displayed in a state, and when the display unit and the reflection unit are held at the non-special display position, The gaming machine according to Feature G5, wherein the game machine is not set.

  According to the feature G6, since the special display position and the non-special display position are set as the positions at which the display unit and the reflection unit are held by the holding unit, the size of the display area can be changed. In particular, in the special display position, the image displayed in the second image area is configured to be visible by being reflected on the reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined position, whereas non-special display. In the position, both the image displayed in the first image area and the image displayed in the second image area are configured to be visible together on the display surface when viewed from a predetermined position. It is possible to set a large change width of the size of the display area at the special display position and the non-special display position.

  In this case, in the special display position, setting of image information for the second image region is performed so that the second image is displayed on the display surface in a state where the second image is reversed in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged. Thus, the image displayed on the reflection surface is originally in a state that should be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, at the non-special display position, image information is set for the second image area so that the second image is displayed on the display surface without being inverted, and is displayed on the display surface. The image is originally in a state that should be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, in the configuration in which the special display position and the non-special display position are set as described above, it is possible to display the image at each display position satisfactorily.

Feature G7. The image display unit is configured by arranging a large number of unit pixel regions (unit pixel regions 95) vertically and horizontally,
The display control means is configured so that the first image region and the second image region are alternately arranged for each unit pixel region in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction of the image display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features G4 to G6, wherein display control of the image display unit is possible.

  According to the feature G7, the distance between the first image regions adjacent to each other with the second image region interposed therebetween, and the distance between the second image regions adjacent to each other with the first image region interposed therebetween are set as unit pixel regions. It becomes possible to suppress. Thereby, in the structure which made it possible to make the image visually recognizable from the first direction different from the image recognizable from the second direction on the display surface, each image is spread over the same region on the display surface. While displaying each, it becomes possible to make the blank generated inside each image as inconspicuous as possible.

  Note that the first image area and the second image area are alternately arranged for each unit pixel area in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, so that the inside of each image. The effect of making the generated blank as inconspicuous as possible can be further enhanced, and the resolution can be increased in a pseudo manner as compared with the configuration in which the image areas are alternately arranged only in one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. It becomes possible.

  Feature G8. The game according to any one of features G4 to G7, wherein the light defining means is formed by providing a plurality of light shielding portions to a transparent panel formed to transmit light. Machine.

  According to the feature G8, the light defining means can be provided with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature G9. A display having a display surface (display surface 29a) and capable of differentiating at least the display when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and the display when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. Means (symbol display device 29);
It has a reflective surface (reflective surfaces 142a, 143a), and when the direction in which the reflective surface is directed intersects the direction in which the display surface is directed, a display that is visible from the second direction is reflected. Reflecting means (mirror unit 141) that is reflected on a surface and is visible from the first direction;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G9, the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and different display can be performed on each of the display surface and the reflection surface. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In addition, by arranging the display means and the reflection means so that at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, a space for providing a display area can be provided in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or the left and right of the gaming machine. The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the direction, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine. Compared to a configuration in which the display area is expanded in the direction and the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each direction.

  Furthermore, when the display area is constituted by the display surface and the reflection surface, the direction of the reflection surface intersects the direction of the display surface, so that the display unit has the same display surface as the display region. Compared to the configuration in which the game machine is tilted in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine, the size of the space for providing the display area in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

Feature G10. Display means having a display surface (display surface 29a) and capable of differentiating the display when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and the display when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. (Design display device 29);
Reflecting means (mirror unit 141) having a reflecting surface (reflecting surfaces 142a, 143a) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
In the display surface, the display surface visible from the second direction is reflected by the reflection surface so that the display surface is visible from the first direction. The directions facing each other are crossed, and further, a display that is visible from the first direction on the display surface and a display that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected by the reflective surface The display means and the reflection means are placed at a special display position where at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine so that both can be viewed from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine. Holding means (torsion coil spring 116, display drive motor 121, common drive motor 161) for holding;
With
The special display position is a position where the display means and the reflection means are held by the holding means so that the reflection surface is arranged above or below the display surface. .

  According to the characteristic G10, the display unit and the reflection unit are held at the special display position by the holding unit, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the space for providing the display area is the vertical direction of the gaming machine, The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply increased. Compared to the configuration in which the gaming machine is expanded in the vertical direction and the gaming machine in the horizontal direction, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each of the above directions.

  Further, the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the direction in which the reflecting surface faces intersects with the direction in which the display face faces, and thus the display means having the same display surface as the display area. Compared to the configuration in which the game machine is tilted in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine, the size of the space for providing the display area in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is arranged above or below the display surface, for the player, in the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface. The influence of the left and right eye parallax on the display is reduced. That is, the angle of the line of sight in the horizontal direction when a predetermined part of the display area is visually recognized is different between the right eye and the left eye. In this case, assuming a configuration in which the display surface and the reflection surface are provided on the left and right, depending on the position of the player's viewpoint with respect to the display area, the viewing angle is directed toward the left side due to the difference in the line of sight between the left eye and the right eye. It is assumed that the set display is viewed with the left eye and the image with the viewing angle set to the right is viewed with the right eye. On the other hand, in the left eye and the right eye, the angle difference between the lines of sight in the vertical direction when viewing a predetermined part of the display area is generally small. Therefore, by arranging the reflective surface above or below the display surface as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as different display between the left eye and the right eye, and for the player to display the display area. The influence of the parallax of the left and right eyes on is reduced.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature group G is effective for the following problems.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area, and when a gaming ball is won at various winning holes in the gaming area, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out. Further, for example, a symbol display device (pattern display device) made up of a liquid crystal display device or the like is installed in the center of the game area, and the symbols are variably displayed by the symbol display device. Specifically, for example, three symbol rows arranged in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction are provided as the symbol variation display, and the symbols are variably displayed for each symbol column. In this case, the symbol display by the symbol display device is started with the winning of the predetermined winning opening as a trigger, and then the symbol variation display is stopped through the variation display and the effect display by the predetermined variation pattern. Then, when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed when the variation display of symbols is stopped, for example, a big hit state is entered and a large amount of game balls are paid out.

  In recent years, the display surface of the symbol display device tends to be enlarged in the pachinko gaming machine. By enlarging the display surface, for example, the power of the display image is improved, and the effect of the effect display is considered to be enhanced. In addition, for example, when abnormality notification is performed, it is considered that the visibility of the display mode is improved.

  However, since the display surface of the symbol display device is arranged at the center of the game area as described above, when the display surface is increased in size, the area around the symbol display device in the game region is narrowed. . For example, if the game ball passing area in the game area is narrowed, the flow pattern of the game ball is restricted, which is not preferable.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the size of the display surface without causing the above-described disadvantages by expanding the vertical or horizontal size of the pachinko gaming machine. However, since pachinko machines are installed in existing island facilities in game halls and the like, it is not preferable to change the size in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

  Note that the above problems are not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but also occur in other gaming machines equipped with a symbol display device.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features G1 to G10, the features A1 to A26, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D20, the features E1 to E11, and the features F1. The configuration limited by any one of -F13 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably displaying the plurality of pictures based on the operation of the start operation means, and based on the operation of the stop operation means A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped and a privilege is given to a player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 23 ... Game board as visual recognition area formation part, 29 ... Symbol display apparatus, 29a ... Display surface, 35 ... Opening part, 54 ... Window panel, 61 ... Symbol display unit, 65 ... Main controller, 68 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS ... Sound emission control device, 83 ... Display control device, 84 ... Drive mechanism, 85 ... Movable object unit, 86, 87 ... Radiation fan as cooling means, 91 ... Liquid crystal display part, 94 ... Parallax barrier panel, 95 ... Unit pixel 96: Upper display area, 97: Lower display area, 102: Storage space for cooling, 121: Display drive motor, 131: Support base, 134: Common drive mechanism, 141: Second movable part Mirror unit, 142a ... first reflecting surface, 143a ... second reflecting surface, 151 ... shutter as first movable part, 161 ... common drive motor, 162 to 164 ... common gear, 1 8 ... Transparent panel, 171 ... Ceiling side vent, 174 ... Bottom side vent, 182 ... Display CPU, 183 ... VDP, 203 ... Character ROM, 204 ... Video RAM, 206 ... Image processing device, 211 ... Cache area, 212 ... Drawing area, 215 ... Unit frame area, 215a ... Upper drawing frame, 215b ... Lower drawing frame, SC1 ... Signal signal path, SC2 ... Transfer signal path, SC3 ... Non-multi and multi Signal path.

Claims (2)

A visual recognition area forming section for forming a visual recognition area visible to the player through a window panel provided on the front surface portion of the gaming machine;
A display unit having a display area for performing a predetermined display, and arranged so that the display area is exposed to the window panel side through an opening formed in the visual recognition area forming unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Drive means for displacing the display means so that the display means can be arranged at each of the first position and the second position;
Space defining means for defining an accommodation space in which the display means can be accommodated behind the opening;
With
When the display means is displaced between the first position and the second position, the display means is configured to be displaced in the accommodation space.
When the display means is disposed at the second position, the distance between the display means and the peripheral edge of the opening is longer than that at the first position, and the display means and the peripheral edge of the opening. The predetermined effect using the predetermined space between the parts is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine,
When the display means is arranged at the first position, the distance between the display means and the peripheral edge of the opening is closer than that at the second position, but the opening means causes the opening to be opened by the display means. It is a configuration that can not be blocked,
This game machine
In the situation where the display means is arranged at the first position, the display means is arranged at a closed position where the space between the display means and the peripheral edge of the opening is closed so as not to be exposed to the window panel side, and the display A shutter disposed at a retracted position displaced from the closed position toward the outside of the region exposed through the opening in a situation where the means is disposed at the second position;
Production means for executing the predetermined production;
With
A light emitter is provided on the back surface of the shutter, and the shutter is formed so that light emitted from the light emitter can be transmitted toward the front of the gaming machine,
When the display means is disposed at the second position, the space defining means is visible through the space between the display means and the peripheral edge of the opening, but behind the space defining means. The side is configured to be difficult to see by the space defining means,
The effect means is displaceable between an effect position entering the predetermined space and a non-effect position retracted toward the outside of the predetermined space from the effect position, and the display means is at the first position. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is arranged at the non-production position in a situation where it is arranged, and is arranged at the production position in a situation where the display means is arranged at the second position.   The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is played using a game medium.

Images